2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owners PDF

Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-47
Performance and Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Keys, Doors, and Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-67
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-26 Special Application
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-36
2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
COLORADO are trademarks and/or Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
appears in this manual.
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20901233 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
J : OnStar® Hands-Free Phone : : Oil Pressure
J : Brake System Warning } : Power
Light > : Safety Belt Reminders
" : Charging System 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
I : Cruise Control d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
B : Engine Coolant Temperature M : Windshield Washer Fluid
O : Exterior Lamps
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Steering Wheel System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Driving for Better Fuel
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Roadside Assistance
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Vehicle Features OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Driver Information
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar

In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑3. G. Parking Brake on page 9‑45. Initial Drive
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. H. Data Link Connector (DLC)
See Turn and Lane-Change (Out of View). See Malfunction
Information
Signals on page 6‑4. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13. This section provides a brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer on I. Horn on page 5‑2. overview about some of the
page 5‑2. important features that may or may
J. StabiliTrak® System on not be on your specific vehicle.
C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7. page 9‑48.
For more detailed information, refer
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Four-Wheel Drive on to each of the features which can be
page 6‑4. page 10‑30. found later in this owner manual.
E. Passenger Side Airbag. See K. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
Airbag System on page 3‑20. L. Climate Control Systems on
F. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 8‑1.
page 6‑1. M. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 N. Passenger Airbag Status
(If Equipped). Indicator on page 5‑11.
Exterior Cargo Lamps on
page 6‑5.
1-4 In Brief
Remote Keyless Entry Lock and unlock feedback can be

personalized. See Driver
(RKE) System Information Center (DIC) on
The RKE transmitter is used to lock page 5‑20.
and unlock the doors from up to 9 m See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
(30 ft) away from the vehicle. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Door Locks
Manual Door Locks
Lock or unlock the doors from the
outside with the key in the driver or From inside the vehicle, move the
front passenger door or press the lever on the door forward or
LOCK or UNLOCK button on the rearward to lock or unlock the door.
Remote Keyless Entry Seeing the red line on the lever
(RKE) transmitter. indicates the door is unlock.
Press UNLOCK to unlock the doors

and press LOCK to lock them.
Press L to sound the horn and to
flash the exterior lamps for
30 seconds.
In Brief 1-5
Power Door Locks Safety Locks (Crew Cab) Tailgate

If the vehicle is a crew cab model, it
may have rear door safety locks on
the rear doors. With this feature, the
rear doors are locked so they
cannot be opened from the inside.
Vehicles with power door locks, the Open the tailgate by pulling up on
switches are located on the front the outside handle while pulling the
door armrests. tailgate down.
Press L to lock the doors. On vehicles with a locking tailgate,
Press U to unlock the doors. use the ignition key to unlock it.
The rear door safety locks are
For more information see: located on the inside edge of each For more information see Tailgate
rear door below the safety lock on page 2‑8.
. Door Locks on page 2‑5.
label.
. Power Door Locks on page 2‑6.
For more information, see Safety
Locks (Crew Cab) on page 2‑6.
1-6 In Brief
Windows Power Windows Express-Down Window

Manual Windows Windows with an express-down
feature allow the window to be
lowered fully without pressing and
holding the switch. Press the front of
the switch to the first position, and
the window opens a small amount.
Press the switch down fully and the
window goes all the way down.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, pull up the front of the
switch.
Regular Cab Shown, Crew Cab

Similar
Use the window crank to open and Push the switch down to open the
close each window. window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
See Manual Windows on page 2‑17
or Power Windows on page 2‑17.
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment Power Seats Use the vertical control to adjust the
seatback.
Manual Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 and Reclining Seatbacks
on page 3‑4 for more information.
Power Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if available:
To adjust a manual seat:

. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
1. Lift the bar under the front of the forward or rearward.
seat cushion to unlock the seat. . Raise or lower the front or rear
2. Slide the seat to the desired part of the seat cushion by If available, press and hold the front
position and release the bar. moving the front or rear of the or rear of the control to increase or
3. Try to move the seat back and control up or down. decrease lumbar support. Release
forth to make sure it is locked in . Raise or lower the entire seat by the control when the level of support
place. moving the entire control up is reached.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 or down. See Lumbar Adjustment on
for more information. page 3‑4 for more information.
1-8 In Brief
Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
If available, the switches are on the Adjustment on page 3‑3. Refer to the following sections for
outboard sides of the front seats. To important information on how to use
operate, the ignition must be on. safety belts properly.
. Press the top of the switch for . Safety Belts on page 3‑11.
the high setting. . How to Wear Safety Belts
. Press the bottom of the switch Properly on page 3‑12.
for the low setting. . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑13.
. Put the switch in the center . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
position to turn this feature off. Children (LATCH System) on
See Heated Front Seats on page 3‑43.
page 3‑7 for more information.
In Brief 1-9
Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

System Exterior Mirrors
The passenger sensing system,
if equipped, will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver United States
airbags are not affected by this.
If the vehicle has one of the
passenger airbag status indicators
pictured in the following illustrations,
then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system.
The passenger airbag status Canada and Mexico
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is See Passenger Sensing System on
started. page 3‑27 for important information. Vehicles with outside power mirrors
have controls on the driver door
armrest.
1-10 In Brief
To adjust the power mirrors: Vehicles with manual outside Interior Mirror
1. Move the selector switch to the mirrors can be adjusted by pressing
On vehicles with a manual inside
L (left) or R (right) to choose the the mirror up and down and left and
rearview mirror, the mirror can be
driver or passenger mirror. right so that you can see a clear
adjusted by holding it in the center
view behind you.
2. Press one of the four arrows to move it for a clear view behind
located on the control pad to Manually fold the mirrors inward to you. To avoid glare from the
move the mirror to the desired prevent damage when going headlamps behind you, push the tab
direction. through an automatic car wash. To forward for daytime use and pull it
fold, push the mirror toward the for nighttime use.
3. Return the selector switch to the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
center position once the mirrors See Manual Rearview Mirror on
return to its original position.
are adjusted. page 2‑15.
See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑14.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14. The automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror will automatically
reduce the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑15.
In Brief 1-11
Steering Wheel Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Adjustment Dome Lamps Press the lens on the lamps to turn
each reading lamp on or off.
The dome lamps come on when any
door is opened. These lamps will not come on with
the dome lamps.
To manually turn on the dome
lamps, turn the thumbwheel, located For more information see:
next to the exterior lamps control, all . “Dome Lamp Override” under
the way up. The cargo lamps may Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.
come on, if the vehicle is equipped . Instrument Panel Illumination
with Bluetooth. In this position, the Control on page 6‑6.
lamps remain on whether a door is
opened or closed. . Exit Lighting on page 6‑7.
The steering wheel adjustment lever
is located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
To adjust:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-12 In Brief
Exterior Lighting For more information, see: Windshield Wiper/Washer

. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
. Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑3.
. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
. Exterior Cargo Lamps on
page 6‑5.
O : Turns off all exterior lamps
including the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Automatic operation of the 8: For a single wipe, move the
headlamps and other exterior lamps band to 8 and then release it. For
at normal brightness.
several wipes, hold the band on 8
; : Manual operation of the longer.
parking lamps and other exterior
lamps.
5 : Manual operation of the
headlamps and other exterior
lamps.
In Brief 1-13
N: For adjustable interval wipes, Climate Controls

turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
6: For slow wipes, turn the
band to the first solid position past
the delay settings.
1: For fast wipes, turn the band to
the second solid position past the
delay settings.
9: Use to turn the wipers off.
Windshield Washer: Push the
paddle on top of the turn signal/lane
change lever to spray washer fluid
on the windshield. A. Temperature Control D. Air Conditioning
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on B. Fan Control E. Air Recirculation
page 5‑2. C. Air Delivery Mode Control See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
1-14 In Brief
Four-Wheel Drive N (Neutral): Use the N (Neutral)

{ WARNING position only when towing the
Four-wheel drive sends engine vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle
power to all four wheels for extra Shifting the transfer case to Towing on page 10‑91.
traction. N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is 4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use when
in P (Park). You or someone else extra traction is needed in most
could be seriously injured. Be off-road situations.
sure to set the parking brake
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): Use this
before placing the transfer case in
position to deliver extra torque to all
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
four wheels. Used for extreme off‐
page 9‑45. road conditions. See Four-Wheel
The transfer case buttons are Drive on page 9‑40.
located to the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument panel.
Use these buttons to shift into and
out of four-wheel drive.
2 m (Two-Wheel High): Use for
driving in most street and highway
situations.
In Brief 1-15
Vehicle Features q TUNE r: Turn to select radio

stations.
Radio(s) q SEEK r : Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 7‑1.
Setting Preset Stations
Radio stations are stored as
presets.
For vehicles with an XM radio, a
maximum of 30 stations can be
stored as presets using the six
numbered pushbuttons.
If the radio does not have XM, up to
18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and
six AM), can be programmed on the
six numbered buttons.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
See “Setting Preset Stations” under
PWR: Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to switch between Operation on page 7‑3.
and off. FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1, or XM2
q VOL r : Turn to increase or (if equipped). The selection
decrease the volume. displays.
1-16 In Brief
Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Cruise Control

To set the time and date for the XM is a satellite radio service based
radio with CD (MP3/WMA): in the 48 contiguous United States
Press and hold the HR button until and 10 Canadian provinces.
the correct hour displays. Press and XM satellite radio has a wide variety
hold the MN button until the correct of programming and
minute displays. The time can be commercial-free music, coast to
set with the ignition on or off. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
To synchronize the time with an A fee is required to receive the The cruise controls are located at
FM station broadcasting Radio Data XM service. the end of the multifunction lever.
System (RDS) information, press For more information, refer to: 9: Turns the system off.
and hold the HR and MN buttons at R: Turns the system on.
the same time until RDS TIME
. www.xmradio.com or call
displays. To accept this time, press 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) + (Resume/Accelerate): Use to
and hold the HR and MN buttons, at . www.xmradio.ca or call make the vehicle accelerate or
the same time, for another 1-877-438-9677 (Canada) resume a previously set speed.
two seconds. If the time is not r T (Set): Press the button at
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.
available from the station, NO the end of the lever to set the
UPDAT (update) displays. speed.
RDS time is broadcast once a For more information, see Cruise
minute. After tuning to an RDS Control on page 9‑50.
broadcast station, it could take a
few minutes for the time to update.
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for your specific audio
system, see Clock on page 5‑4.
In Brief 1-17
Driver Information Power Outlets Performance and

Center (DIC) The accessory power outlets can be Maintenance
The DIC is located on the used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
instrument panel cluster. It displays Traction Control
the status of many vehicle systems The vehicle may have an accessory
and enables some features to be
System (TCS)
power outlet located below the
personalized. climate control system and on the The traction control system limits
rear of the center console. wheel spin. The system turns on
Use the trip reset stem located on
automatically every time the vehicle
the instrument panel cluster to scroll See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. is started.
through the available functions. For
more information, see Driver . To turn off traction control, press
Information Center (DIC) on and release the TCS/StabiliTrak
page 5‑20. button d on the instrument
Vehicle Personalization panel. g illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is
Some vehicle features can be
displayed. See Ride Control
personalized through the DIC.
System Messages on page 5‑26.
These features include:
. Press and release the TCS/
. Language: English, Spanish,
StabiliTrak button again to turn
or French
on traction control.
. Automatic Door Locks
For more information, see Traction
. RKE Feedback Control System (TCS) on
For more information, see Driver page 9‑47.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑20.
1-18 In Brief
StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire when the vehicle is first started and
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). then turn off. This may be an early
difficult driving conditions. The indicator that the tire pressures are
system turns on automatically every getting low and the tires need to be
time the vehicle is started. inflated to the proper pressure.
. To turn off both traction control The TPMS does not replace normal
and StabiliTrak, press and hold monthly tire maintenance. It is the
the TCS/StabiliTrak button d driver’s responsibility to maintain
until g illuminates and the correct tire pressures.
The TPMS warning light alerts you
appropriate DIC message is to a significant loss in pressure of See Tire Pressure Monitor System
displayed. See Ride Control one of the vehicle's tires. If the on page 10‑56.
System Messages on page 5‑26. warning light comes on, stop as
. Press and release the TCS/ soon as possible and inflate the Engine Oil Life System
StabiliTrak button again to turn tires to the recommended pressure The engine oil life system calculates
on both systems. shown on the Tire and Loading engine oil life based on vehicle use
Information label. See Vehicle Load and displays a DIC message when
For more information, see
Limits on page 9‑19. The warning
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48. it is necessary to change the engine
light will remain on until the tire oil and filter.
pressure is corrected.
In Brief 1-19
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Resetting the Oil Life System Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
with the engine off. near the size.
Driving habits can affect fuel
2. Press and release the stem in mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
the lower center of the to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
instrument cluster until the OIL possible.
LIFE message is displayed. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE smoothly. Program
and RESET messages appear,
press and hold the stem until
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
several beeps sound. This abrupt stops.
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
confirms that the oil life system . Avoid idling the engine for long
has been reset. periods of time. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. . When road and weather Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
See Engine Oil Life System on conditions are appropriate, use As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
page 10‑12. cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the
. Always follow posted speed Roadside Assistance program.
limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
conditions require. (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
. Keep vehicle tires properly Roadside Assistance Program
inflated. (Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
information.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
1-20 In Brief
Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

(U.S. and Canada)
Q : Push this blue button to
If you have an active OnStar connect to a specially trained
subscription, press the Q button OnStar Advisor to verify your
and the current GPS location will be account information and to answer
sent to an OnStar advisor who will questions.
assess your problem, contact ] : Push this red emergency
Roadside Assistance, and relay button to get priority help from
your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar Emergency
you need. subscription, OnStar uses several Advisors.
Online Owner Center (U.S. and innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for hands‐free,
Canada) Advisors to provide a wide range of voice‐activated calling and to give
safety, security, navigation, voice commands for Hands‐Free
The Online Owner Center is a diagnostics, and calling services.
complimentary service that includes Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
online service reminders, vehicle Automatic Crash Response Navigation.
maintenance tips, online owner In a crash, built‐in sensors Automatic Crash Response,
manual, special privileges, automatically alert an OnStar Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
and more. Advisor who is immediately Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to see if Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
you need help. Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling
“Owners,” then “Manage My are available on most vehicles. Not
Chevrolet/Owners Login”) all OnStar services are available on
Canada: chevroletowner.ca all vehicles. For more information,
In Brief 1-21
see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visit service provider has coverage, to important parts of your vehicle in
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or network capacity, reception, and a crash, or wireless phone network
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact technology compatible with OnStar's congestion or jamming.
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR service. Service involving location See Radio Frequency Statement on
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or information about your vehicle page 13‑22 for information
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push cannot work unless GPS signals are regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Q to speak with an OnStar Advisor available, unobstructed, and Communications Commission (FCC)
24 hours a day, seven days a week. compatible with the OnStar rules and Industry Canada
For a full description of OnStar hardware. The vehicle must have a Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
services and system limitations, see working electrical system and
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the adequate battery power for the Your Responsibility
glove box. OnStar equipment to operate.
Increase the volume of the radio if
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar service is subject to the the OnStar Advisor cannot be
OnStar equipment is not properly
OnStar Terms and Conditions heard.
installed or you have not maintained
included in the OnStar Glove it even if your vehicle is in good If the light next to the OnStar
Box Kit. working order and in compliance buttons is red, the system may not
OnStar service requires wireless with all government regulations. be functioning properly. Push Q
communication networks and the If you try to add, connect, or modify and request a vehicle diagnostic.
Global Positioning System (GPS) any equipment or software in your If the light appears clear (no light
satellite network. Not all OnStar vehicle, OnStar service may not appears), your OnStar subscription
services are available everywhere work. Other problems beyond has expired and all services have
OnStar's control may prevent
or on all vehicles at all times. been deactivated. Push Q to
service to you, such as hills, tall
OnStar service cannot work unless confirm that the OnStar equipment
buildings, tunnels, weather,
your vehicle is in a place where is active.
electrical system design and
OnStar has an agreement with a architecture of your vehicle, damage
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
1-22 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Windows Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Windows
Keys and Locks Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 (PASS-Key III+ Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Immobilizer Operation
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 (Passlock U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 2-13
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Exterior Mirrors
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Safety Locks (Crew Cab) . . . . . 2-6 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks If locked out of your vehicle, call the

Roadside Assistance Center. See
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
Keys and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Assistance Program
{ WARNING (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Leaving children in a vehicle with With an active OnStar subscription,

the ignition key is dangerous for an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® on
many reasons. Children or others
page 1‑20.
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
Remote Keyless Entry
The key can be used for the ignition, (RKE) System
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks, and the tailgate.
The windows will function with the See Radio Frequency Statement on
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag page 13‑22 for information
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith regarding Part 15 of the Federal
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store Communications Commission (FCC)
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not rules and Industry Canada
a vehicle with children. in your vehicle. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE Remote Keyless Entry

operating range:
(RKE) System Operation
. Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from Vehicles with Remote Keyless
the vehicle. Entry (RKE), transmitter functions
work up to 9 m (30 ft) away from the
. Check the location. Other vehicle.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
. Check the transmitter's battery. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
See “Battery Replacement” later Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your UNLOCK: Press to unlock the
dealer or a qualified technician driver door and turn on the interior
for service. lamps. The parking lamps may flash
and the horn may sound.
Press UNLOCK again within
three seconds and all of the doors
unlock.
LOCK: Press to lock all the doors. Programming Transmitters to To replace the battery:
The parking lamps may flash and the Vehicle
the horn may sound.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
If a door is open or ajar when LOCK to the vehicle will work. If a
is pressed, the horn sounds transmitter is lost or stolen, a
several times to let you know the replacement can be purchased and
doors did not lock and the content programmed through your dealer.
theft‐deterrent system is not armed. When the replacement transmitter is
Pressing LOCK again while the horn programmed to the vehicle, all
is sounding or within three seconds remaining transmitters must also be
after the horn stops sounding, the programmed. Any lost or stolen
doors lock but the content transmitters no longer work once the
theft‐deterrent system does not arm new transmitter is programmed.
until the opened door is closed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it. 1. Separate the transmitter with a
Different feedback modes can be
flat, thin object inserted in the
programmed through the Driver Battery Replacement slot between the covers of the
Information Center (DIC). See
Notice: When replacing the transmitter housing.
“Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”
under Driver Information Center battery, do not touch any of the 2. Remove the old battery. Do not
(DIC) on page 5‑20. circuitry on the transmitter. Static use a metal object.
from your body could damage the
L (Panic): Press to make the transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace
horn sound and the headlamps and with a CR2032 or equivalent
taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds. battery.
To turn them off wait for 30 seconds, 4. Put the transmitter back
or press L again, or start the together.
vehicle.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

To lock or unlock the door from the
outside, use the key in the driver or
front passenger door or press the
{ WARNING . Young children who get into LOCK or UNLOCK button on the
unlocked vehicles may be Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can transmitter.
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent To lock a door from the inside, move
. Passengers, especially
the manual lever on the door
children, can easily open the injuries or even death from
forward. To unlock a door from the
doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the
inside, move the lever on the door
vehicle. When a door is vehicle whenever leaving it. rearward.
locked, the handle will not . Outsiders can easily enter You will see a colored area on the
open it. The chance of being
through an unlocked door lever when the door is unlocked.
thrown out of the vehicle in a
when you slow down or stop
crash is increased if the
the vehicle. Locking the doors
doors are not locked. So, all
can help prevent this from
passengers should wear
happening.
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection

If the vehicle has power door locks If the vehicle has power door locks,
and the remote keyless entry this feature protects you from
system, it has an automatic lock/ locking the key in the vehicle when
unlock feature. the key is in the ignition and a door
If the vehicle has an automatic is open.
transmission, it is programmed from If the power door lock switch is
the factory to lock all doors pressed when a door is open and
automatically when the shift lever is the key is in the ignition, all of the
moved out of P (Park). All the doors doors will lock and then the driver
will unlock when the shift lever is door will unlock.
moved back into P (Park).
If the vehicle has a manual Safety Locks (Crew Cab)
Vehicles with power door locks, the transmission, it is programmed from If the vehicle is a crew cab model, it
switches are located on the front the factory to lock all the doors may have rear door safety locks.
door armrests. when the vehicle speed is greater With this feature, the rear doors are
than 24 km/h (15 mph). The doors locked so they cannot be opened
Press L to lock the doors.
will unlock when the key is removed from the inside.
Press U to unlock the doors. from the ignition.
To change the automatic door lock
and unlock settings, see “Automatic
Door Locks” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑20.
To open a rear door when the safety Doors

lock is on, unlock the door and open
the door from the outside.
Rear Doors
To disengage the safety locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using the ignition key, turn the
safety lock to the vertical
position.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other
rear door.
The rear door safety lock is located
on the inside edge of each rear door
below the safety lock label.
To engage the safety locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors. To open the door, open the front
door. Then, use the handle to open
2. Using the ignition key, turn the
the rear door. The rear door must be
safety lock to the horizontal
closed before closing the front door.
position.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other
rear door.
Tailgate Tailgate Removal

To remove the tailgate:
{ WARNING 1. With the tailgate fully open, lift
up slightly on the entire tailgate
It is extremely dangerous to ride
assembly.
on the tailgate, even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate
can easily lose their balance
and fall in response to vehicle
maneuvers. Falling from a moving
vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death. Do not allow Open the tailgate by pulling up on
people to ride on the tailgate. Be the outside handle while pulling the
sure everyone in your vehicle is in tailgate down.
a seat and using a safety belt When the tailgate is shut, be sure it
properly. is latched securely.
On vehicles with a locking tailgate,
use the ignition key. Turn the key 2. Remove the retaining cables
counterclockwise to lock the from both sides of the tailgate by
tailgate. Turn the key clockwise to pulling the clips away from the
unlock the tailgate. bolt heads while pushing the
cable bracket forward.
When the larger part of the hole
on the bracket is over the bolt,
slide the bracket off of the bolt.
3. With the tailgate partially down, 3. Slide the lower end fitting onto
lift up on the passenger side and the top bolt. The tailgate will now
pull the tailgate toward you, then stay in the partially opened
move the tailgate to the right to position.
release the driver side. You can 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the
then remove the entire tailgate driver side.
assembly.
If you would like to close the
Reverse the procedure to reinstall tailgate, the bracket cannot be in the
the tailgate. Make sure it is secure. partially opened position. Use the
To partially lower the tailgate: top position on the bracket to
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift anchor it on the bottom bolt.
up slightly on the entire tailgate Tailgate Partially Down
assembly.
2. Remove the retaining cable from
the passenger side of the
tailgate by pulling the clip away
from the bolt head while pushing
the cable bracket forward.
When the larger part of the hole
on the bracket is over the bolt,
slide the bracket off the bolt.
Vehicle Security If the LOCK button on the RKE

transmitter is pressed, but a door is
remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key
This vehicle has theft-deterrent open, the horn will chirp six times. if the alarm has been set off.
features; however, they do not make Press the LOCK button again, within Here is how to avoid setting off the
it impossible to steal. three seconds, and the doors will alarm by accident:
lock. Close the open door and the
Anti-theft Alarm System system will be activated. . If you do not want to activate the
theft-deterrent system, the
If a locked door is not opened using vehicle should be locked with
the RKE transmitter, or by OnStar ®, the door key after the doors are
the pre-alarm will go off. If the closed.
engine is not started or UNLOCK
not pressed within 10 seconds, the . Always unlock a door with the
front turn signal lamps will flash for RKE transmitter. Unlocking a
two minutes, and the horn will sound door any other way will set off
If your vehicle has the Remote for two minutes, then will turn off to the alarm.
Keyless Entry (RKE) system, the save the battery power. If you set off the alarm by accident,
vehicle has a content theft-deterrent Remember, the theft-deterrent you can turn off the alarm by
alarm system. system will not activate if you lock pressing UNLOCK on the RKE
To activate the content the doors with a key, the manual transmitter. The alarm will not stop if
theft-deterrent system: door lock, or power door lock you try to unlock a door any
switch. The system can only be other way.
1. Close all the doors.
activated using the RKE transmitter,
2. Lock the doors with the RKE or by OnStar®. See the OnStar
transmitter. The security light, Owner's Guide for additional
located on the instrument panel information. You should also
cluster, will flash.
Testing the Alarm Immobilizer The key uses a transponder that

matches an immobilizer control unit
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on in the vehicle. Only the correct key
1. From inside the vehicle, activate page 13‑22 for information starts the vehicle. If the key is ever
the system by locking the doors regarding Part 15 of the Federal damaged, the vehicle may not start.
with the RKE transmitter. Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada When trying to start the vehicle,
2. Unlock the door with the manual Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. if the engine does not start and the
door lock and open the door. security light comes on, there may
This should set off the alarm. be a problem with the theft-deterrent
Immobilizer Operation system. Turn the ignition off and try
3. To turn the alarm off, press the (PASS-Key III+
UNLOCK button on the RKE again.
transmitter or start the engine. Canada Only) If the engine still does not start, and
If the alarm does not sound when it This vehicle has a passive the key appears to be undamaged,
should but the lights flash, check to theft-deterrent system. try another ignition key. Check the
see if the horn works. The horn fuse fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
The system is automatically armed Breakers on page 10‑40. If the
may be blown. To replace the fuse, when the key is removed from the
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on engine still does not start with the
ignition. other key, the vehicle needs service.
page 10‑40.
The system is automatically If the vehicle does start, the first key
If the alarm does not sound or the disarmed when the key is turned to may be faulty. See your dealer who
front turn signal lamps do not flash, ON/RUN. can service the theft-deterrent
see your dealer for service. system and have a new key made.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
The security light comes on if there
is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent 3. After the engine has started, turn If the security light comes on and
system decoder to learn the the key to LOCK/OFF, and stays on while driving, the engine
transponder value of a new or remove the key. will restart if you turn it off. However,
replacement key. Up to 10 keys can 4. Insert the second current driver's the theft-deterrent system is not
be programmed for the vehicle. The key in the ignition and start the working properly and must be
following procedure is for engine within ten seconds of serviced by your dealer. The
programming additional keys only. removing the previous key. If the vehicle is not protected by the
Canadian Owners: If the keys are engine does not start see your theft-deterrent system at this time.
lost or damaged, only a dealer can dealer for service. In an emergency, contact Roadside
service the theft-deterrent system to 5. After the engine has started, turn Assistance. See Roadside
have new ones made. Two current the key to LOCK/OFF, and Assistance Program (U.S. and
driver's keys are required to remove the key. Insert the key to Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
program additional keys. be programmed and turn it to Assistance Program (Mexico) on
To program a new key: ON/RUN within ten seconds of page 13‑10.
1. Verify that the new key has removing the previous key. Do not leave the key or device that
PK3+ stamped on it. The security light turns off once disarms or deactivates the theft
the key has been programmed. deterrent system in the vehicle.
2. Insert the current driver's key in
the ignition and start the engine. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if
If the engine does not start see additional keys are to be
your dealer for service. programmed.
Immobilizer Operation If the engine does not start after Exterior Mirrors
three tries, the vehicle needs
(Passlock U.S. Only) service.
Passlock® is a passive Convex Mirrors
If the engine is running and the
theft-deterrent system that enables security light comes on, the engine
fuel if the vehicle is started with a restarts if you turn the engine off. { WARNING
valid key. If an incorrect key is used However, the Passlock® system is
or the ignition lock cylinder is A convex mirror can make things,
not working properly and must be like other vehicles, look farther
tampered with, the fuel system is serviced by your dealer. The vehicle
disabled and the vehicle does not away than they really are. If you
is not protected by Passlock® at this
start. cut too sharply into the right lane,
time. See your dealer for service.
you could hit a vehicle on the
The security light turns off In an emergency, call the Roadside
approximately five seconds after right. Check the inside mirror or
Assistance Center. See Roadside glance over your shoulder before
the engine is started. See Security Assistance Program (U.S. and
Light on page 5‑19. changing lanes.
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
If the engine stalls and the security Assistance Program (Mexico) on
light flashes, wait about 10 minutes page 13‑10. The passenger side mirror is convex
until the light stops flashing before shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
Do not leave the key or device that curved so more can be seen from
trying to restart the engine. Release disarms or deactivates the theft
the key from START as soon as the the driver seat.
deterrent system in the vehicle.
engine starts.
Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Return the selector switch to the

center position once the mirrors
Adjust the mirrors by pressing the are adjusted.
mirror up and down and left and
right so you can see a clear view If the mirror begins making a
behind you. ratcheting sound, the mirror has
reached the end of its travel and
Manually fold the mirrors inward to can go no farther in that direction.
prevent damage when going To stop the sound, reverse the
through an automatic car wash. To mirror direction using the
fold, push the mirrors toward the control pad.
vehicle. Push outward, to return the
mirrors to their original position. Manually fold the mirrors inward to
prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the
Vehicles with outside power mirrors vehicle. Push outward, to return the
have controls on the driver door mirror to its original position.
armrest.
To adjust the power mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch to the
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons
located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press

Rearview Mirror and hold AUTO/ ( for about
Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic three seconds or depending on the
Adjust this mirror for a clear view of dimming inside rearview mirror. mirror, press O to turn automatic
the area behind the vehicle. Hold Automatic dimming reduces the dimming on or off. The automatic
the mirror in the center to move it glare of lights from behind the dimming feature comes on and the
up, down, or side-to-side. To reduce vehicle. indicator light illuminates each time
headlamp glare, push the tab the vehicle is started.
The mirror may also have OnStar®
forward for daytime use and pull it and/or a compass and outside Temperature Display
for nighttime use. temperature display.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
Y b / O (On/Off): Press Y b or
Control buttons for the OnStar depending on the mirror, press O to
additional control buttons located at system are at the bottom of the
the bottom of the mirror. See your turn the display on or off.
mirror. See the OnStar Owners
dealer for more information on the Guide for more information about To adjust between Fahrenheit and
system and how to subscribe to the services OnStar provides. See Celsius:
OnStar. See the OnStar Owner's Compass on page 5‑3 for more
Guide for more information about 1. Press and hold Y b / O for a
information about the compass
the services OnStar provides. few seconds. The current unit of
display. See “Temperature Display”
measure (C or F) flashes.
after, for more information about the
outside temperature display. 2. Press Y b / O again and
release to change the unit of
measure. Wait several seconds
and the compass/temperature
display returns with the selected
unit of measure.
It is normal under certain conditions Windows

for the temperature update to be
delayed. If an incorrect temperature
displays for an extended period, see { WARNING
your dealer.
Leaving children, helpless adults,
Cleaning the Mirror or pets in a vehicle with the
Do not spray glass cleaner directly windows closed is dangerous.
on the mirror. Use a soft towel They can be overcome by the
dampened with water. extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when a window is
partially open. To reduce the sound,
open another window or the sunroof
(if equipped).
Manual Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed Regular Cab Shown, Crew Cab
if caught in the path of a closing Similar
On vehicles with manual windows, window. Do not leave keys in a Push the switch down to open the
use the window crank to open and vehicle with children. window. Pull the front of the switch
close each window. up to close it.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout The switches work when the ignition
button to prevent unintentional is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
operation of the windows. or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑31.
Express-Down Window Window Lockout (Crew Cab) Press o to activate the rear
Windows with an express-down window lockout switch. The red
feature allow the window to be line (A) will not be visible when
lowered fully without pressing and activated.
holding the switch. Press the front of Press o again to deactivate the
the switch to the first position, and
lockout switch. The red line (A) is
the window opens a small amount.
visible when deactivated.
Press the switch down fully and the
window goes all the way down.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, pull up the front of the
switch.
This feature prevents the rear

passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
Rear Windows Sun Visors

Sliding Rear Window
Pull the sun visor down to block

glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
If the vehicle has this feature,
squeeze the latch in the center of
the window and slide the glass to
open it.
Be sure the latch is engaged when
the window is closed.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Securing Child Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-54
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 What Will You See after an (Center Front Seat
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Rear Seats Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats (Extended Cab) . . . 3-8 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Right Front Seat
Rear Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . 3-9 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-33
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-34
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Replacing Airbag System
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
On some crew cab models, the
vehicle's front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
adjusted properly. chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust the seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock To adjust the seat, if available:
the seat. . Move the seat forward or
2. Slide the seat to the desired rearward by sliding the control
position and release the bar. forward or rearward.
3. Try to move the seat back and . Raise or lower the front or rear
forth to be sure the seat is part of the seat cushion by
locked in place. moving the front or rear of the
control up or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see “Power Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks

Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑4.
{ WARNING
Lumbar Adjustment Sitting in a reclined position when
Manual Lumbar the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The safety belt cannot properly
restrain you, and you could be
injured or killed.
For proper protection when the
If available, press and hold the front vehicle is in motion, have the
or rear of the control to increase or seatback upright. Then sit well
decrease lumbar support. Release back in the seat and wear the
the control when the seatback safety belt properly.
reaches the desired level of lumbar
support.
If available, the manual lumbar knob
is on the outboard side of the
driver seat.
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease lumbar support.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is not moving. To recline a manual seatback:
the vehicle is moving. 1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
{ WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright Power Reclining Seatbacks Seatback Latches
position:
The vehicle may have front
1. Lift the lever fully without seatbacks that fold forward for easy
applying pressure to the access to the rear seats or the
seatback, and the seatback will storage area behind the seats.
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To recline a power seatback,

if available:
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward To fold the seatback forward, push
to raise. the lever on the side of the seat
rearward and pull the seatback
forward.
Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it { WARNING
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause If you cannot feel temperature
injury to the person sitting there. change or pain to the skin, the
Always push and pull on the seat heater may cause burns
seatbacks to be sure they are even at low temperatures. To
locked. reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
To return the seatback to the upright especially for long periods of
position, push the seatback all the time. Do not place anything on If available, the switches are on the
way back until it latches. outboard sides of the front seats. To
the seat that insulates against
If the seatback was reclined before heat, such as a blanket, cushion, operate, the ignition must be on.
being folded forward, it will return to cover, or similar item. This may
the reclined position. cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
This feature will heat the cushion Rear Seats The rear seat storage compartments
and back of the seats. must be closed before folding the
seat down. See Rear Storage on
. Press the top of the switch for Rear Seats page 4‑2.
the high setting.
(Extended Cab) Notice: Folding a rear seat with
. Press the bottom of the switch
for the low setting. the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
. Put the switch in the center safety belts. Always unbuckle the
position to turn this feature off. safety belts and return them to
The heated seat will turn on at the their normal stowed position
last setting if the ignition is turned before folding a rear seat.
off and then back on.
The passenger safety belt must be
fastened for the heated seat feature
to work on the passenger seat.
On extended cab models, there may

be forward folding seats in the
rear area.
To fold a rear seat cushion from the
stored position to the sitting
position, pull the front of the seat
cushion down completely. A. Hook and Loop Fastener
To store the seat: To fold a rear seatback:

1. Secure the safety belt buckle to
the inboard side of the seat with
the hook and loop fastener (A),
so that it does not move when
not in use.
2. Push the entire seat up until it is
flush with the trim panel.
Rear Seats (Crew Cab)

On crew cab models, the rear
seatbacks can be folded forward. 2. Pull the loop on the outboard
Notice: Folding a rear seat with side of the seatback forward
the safety belts still fastened may 1. Disconnect the rear center until you hear a click.
cause damage to the seat or the safety belt latch from the 3. Fold the seatback forward.
safety belts. Always unbuckle the mini-buckle by inserting the tip of
safety belts and return them to the safety belt tongue into the
their normal stowed position slot on the buckle. Let the belt
before folding a rear seat. retract.
To return a seatback to the upright 3. Reconnect the center safety belt

position: { WARNING latch plate to the mini-buckle.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it Make sure the safety belt is not
A safety belt that is improperly twisted.
rearward. routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the 4. Push and pull on the latch plate
{ WARNING protection needed in a crash. The to be sure it is secure.
person wearing the belt could be When the seatback is not in use, it
If either seatback is not locked, it seriously injured. After raising the should be kept in the upright, locked
could move forward in a sudden rear seatback, always check to be position.
stop or crash. That could cause sure that the safety belts are
injury to the person sitting there. properly routed and attached, and
Always push and pull on the are not twisted.
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to

make sure it is locked in place.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
Do not let anyone ride where a passengers to ride in any area of
safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too. When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts. going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑9 for additional information. instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
When you wear a safety belt, you Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why How to Wear Safety Belts
and the vehicle slow down together. should I have to wear safety
There is more time to stop because belts?
Properly
you stop over a longer distance and, A: Airbags are supplemental This section is only for people of
when worn properly, your strongest systems only; so they work with adult size.
bones take the forces from the safety belts— not instead of There are special things to know
safety belts. That is why wearing them. Whether or not an airbag about safety belts and children. And
safety belts makes such good is provided, all occupants still there are different rules for smaller
sense. have to buckle up to get the children and infants. If a child will be
Questions and Answers About most protection. riding in the vehicle, see Older
Safety Belts Also, in nearly all states and in Children on page 3‑35 or Infants
all Canadian provinces, the law and Young Children on page 3‑37.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle Follow those rules for everyone's
requires wearing safety belts.
after a crash if I am wearing a protection.
safety belt?
It is very important for all occupants
A: You could be— whether you are to buckle up. Statistics show that
wearing a safety belt or not. unbelted people are hurt more often
Your chance of being conscious in crashes than those who are
during and after a crash, so you wearing safety belts.
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
There are important things to know

. Wear the lap part of the belt low
about wearing a safety belt properly. and snug on the hips, just WARNING (Continued)
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong . Never wear the shoulder belt
pelvic bones and you would be under both arms or behind
less likely to slide under the lap your back.
belt. If you slid under it, the belt . Never route the lap or
would apply force on your shoulder belt over an
abdomen. This could cause armrest.
serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt except for
forces. The shoulder belt locks if the center front passenger position,
. Sit up straight and always keep there is a sudden stop or crash. if equipped, which has a lap belt.
your feet on the floor in front See Lap Belt on page 3‑18 for more
of you. { WARNING information.
. Always use the correct buckle The following instructions explain
You can be seriously injured, how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
for your seating position.
or even killed, by not wearing properly.
your safety belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
. Never allow the lap or adjustable, so you can sit up
shoulder belt to become straight. To see how, see “Seats”
loose or twisted. in the Index.
(Continued)
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
the belt across you. Do not let it height adjuster, move it to the
get twisted. height that is right for you. See
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
you pull the belt across you very later in this section for
quickly. If this happens, let the instructions on use and
belt go back slightly to unlock it. important safety information.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder
portion of a passenger belt out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, just let the belt buckle until it clicks.
go back all the way and start Pull up on the latch plate to
again. make sure it is secure. If the belt
Engaging the child restraint is not long enough, see Safety
locking feature in the right front Belt Extender on page 3‑19.
seating position may affect the Position the release button on
passenger sensing system, the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
if equipped. See Passenger could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
Sensing System on page 3‑27 necessary.
for more information. It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
position.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How To move it up or down, squeeze the
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on release buttons (A) together and
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3‑12. move the height adjuster to the
the latch plate up the safety belt desired position.
webbing when the safety belt is not After the adjuster is set to the
in use. The latch plate should rest desired position, try to move it down
on the stitching on the safety belt, without squeezing the release
near the guide loop on the side wall. buttons to make sure it has locked
Before a door is closed, be sure the into position.
belt is out of the way. If a door is
slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt
and the vehicle.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear shoulder belt comfort guides

may provide added safety belt
This vehicle has safety belt
comfort for older children who have
pretensioners for front outboard
outgrown booster seats and for
occupants. Although the safety belt
some adults. When installed and
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
are part of the safety belt assembly.
positions the belt away from the
They can help tighten the safety
neck and head.
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near
frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
Pretensioners work only once. If the 2. Place the guide over the belt
pretensioners activate in a crash, and insert the two edges of the
they will need to be replaced, and belt into the slots of the guide.
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 3‑20.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the shoulder belt:
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides for the rear 1. Slide the guide off of its storage
outside positions. If not, they are clip located between the interior
available through your dealer. body and the seatback.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release the
twisted and it lies flat. The safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide back on its storage clip
located between the interior body
and the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
page 3‑13. plate and pull it along the belt.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position, and release it the
seating position. When you sit in the same way as the lap part of a
center front seating position, you lap-shoulder belt.
have a lap safety belt, which has no
retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑9 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the Keep safety belts clean and dry.
seat it is made to fit. The extender See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑19.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the belt is snug. has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
If the belt is not long enough, see wear it, attach it to the regular safety Keep belts clean and dry.
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑19. belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would the extender. { WARNING
be able to unbuckle the safety belt Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
quickly if necessary. Safety System Check It may severely weaken them. In
Now and then, check that the safety a crash, they might not be able to
belt reminder light, safety belts, provide adequate protection.
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and Clean safety belts only with mild
anchorages are all working properly. soap and lukewarm water.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be Your vehicle may also have the
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt following airbags:
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. and the passenger seated
serious injury or even death in a directly behind the driver.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a . A roof-rail airbag for the right
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light front passenger and the
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary passenger seated directly
or while you are driving. See Airbag behind the right front passenger.
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑10.
possible. All of the airbags in your vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear along the WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
headliner or trim.
crashes safety belts are your only Airbags inflate with great force,
Airbags are designed to supplement restraint. See When Should an faster than the blink of an eye.
the protection provided by safety Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑24. Anyone who is up against, or very
belts. Even though today's airbags close to, any airbag when it
are also designed to help reduce Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance inflates can be seriously injured
the risk of injury from the force of an or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags close to the airbag, as you would
very quickly to do their job.
are “supplemental restraints” to be if you were sitting on the edge
Here are the most important things of your seat or leaning forward.
to know about the airbag system: the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt Safety belts help keep you in
properly — whether or not there is position before and during a
{ WARNING an airbag for that person. crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
You can be severely injured or should sit as far back as possible
killed in a crash if you are not while still maintaining control of
wearing your safety belt — even if the vehicle.
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety Occupants should not lean on or
belts, but do not replace them. sleep against the door or side
Also, airbags are not designed to windows in seating positions with
deploy in every crash. In some roof-rail airbags.
(Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel, which
for adults and older children, but
shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑10 for
system can provide. Always more information. The driver's airbag is in the middle
secure children properly in the of the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑35 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑37.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put
The right front passenger's airbag is
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel
in the instrument panel on the
passenger's side. hub or on or near any other
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags airbag covering.
for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard Never secure anything to the roof
passengers, they are in the ceiling of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
above the side windows. by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
Inflate? example: impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary Your vehicle has seat position
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate sensors which enables the sensing
or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if system to monitor the position of the
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. driver's seat and the right front
injuries mainly to the driver's or right passenger's seat. Seat position
front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could sensors provide information that is
However, they are only designed to used to determine if the airbags
inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object should deploy at a reduced level or
predetermined deployment at full deployment.
threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object In addition, your vehicle has
crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could dual-stage frontal airbags.
airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed Dual-stage airbags adjust the
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide restraint according to crash severity.
object (like a wall). Your vehicle has electronic frontal
Whether your frontal airbags will or sensors, which help the sensing
should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object system distinguish between a
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could moderate frontal impact and a more
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed severe frontal impact. For moderate
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. inflate at a level less than full
Thresholds can also vary with deployment. For more severe frontal
specific vehicle design. impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 3‑20. Roof-rail airbags are
Inflate? Restrain?
intended to inflate in moderate to In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
severe side crashes. Roof-rail system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted
airbags will inflate if the crash triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering
severity is above the system's inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In
designed threshold level. The airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions,
threshold level can vary with of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact
specific vehicle design. the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the
Both roof-rail airbags will deploy instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the
when either side of the vehicle is seat‐mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping the
struck. there are airbags modules in the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail
In any particular crash, no one can side of the front seatbacks closest airbags distribute the force of the
say whether an airbag should have to the door. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the
inflated simply because of the roof-rail airbags, there are airbag occupant's upper body.
damage to a vehicle or because of modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, But airbags would not help in many
what the repair costs were. For near the side windows that have types of collisions, primarily
frontal airbags, inflation is occupant seating positions. because the occupant's motion is
determined by what the vehicle hits, not toward those airbags. See When
the angle of the impact, and how Should an Airbag Inflate? on
quickly the vehicle slows down. For page 3‑24 for more information.
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
Airbags should never be regarded door lock. The interior lamps and
as anything more than a supplement { WARNING hazard warning flashers will
to safety belts. deactivate after approximately
When an airbag inflates, there 15 minutes.
may be dust in the air. This dust
What Will You See after could cause breathing problems
an Airbag Inflates? for people with a history of { WARNING
After the frontal airbags inflate, they asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate
quickly deflate, so quickly that some To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also
people may not even realize the vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in
airbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel
may still be at least partially inflated breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering
for some time after they deploy. get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
Some components of the airbag airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a
module may be hot for several by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be
minutes. For location of the airbag If you experience breathing concealed damage that could
modules, see What Makes an problems following an airbag
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑25. make it difficult to safely operate
deployment, you should seek the vehicle.
The parts of the airbag that come medical attention.
into contact with you may be warm, Use caution if you should attempt
but not too hot to touch. There may to restart the engine after a crash
The vehicle has a feature that may has occurred.
be some smoke and dust coming
automatically unlock the doors
from the vents in the deflated
(if equipped with power door locks),
airbags. Airbag inflation does not In many crashes severe enough to
turn the interior lamps on, flash the
prevent the driver from seeing out of inflate the airbag, windshields are
hazard warning flashers, turn off the
the windshield or being able to steer broken by vehicle deformation.
radio, and shut off the fuel system
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
after the airbag inflates. You can
people from leaving the vehicle.
lock the doors again by using the
Additional windshield breakage may

. Let only qualified technicians
also occur from the right front work on the airbag system.
passenger airbag. Improper service can mean that
the airbag system will not work
. Airbags are designed to inflate properly. See your dealer for
only once. After an airbag service.
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. United States
If you do not get them, the
Passenger Sensing
airbag system will not be there System
to help protect you in another If the vehicle has one of the
crash. A new system will include passenger airbag status indicators
airbag modules and possibly pictured in the following illustrations,
other parts. The service manual then the vehicle has a passenger
for your vehicle covers the need sensing system for the right front
to replace other parts. Canada and Mexico
passenger position. The passenger
. Your vehicle has a crash airbag status indicator, if equipped, The words ON and OFF, or the
sensing and diagnostic module is visible on the instrument panel symbol for on and off, will be visible
which records information after a when the vehicle is started. during the system check. When the
crash. See Vehicle Data system check is complete, either the
In addition, if the vehicle has a word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
Recording and Privacy on passenger sensing system for the
page 13‑20 and Event Data on or off will be visible. See
right front passenger position, the Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Recorders on page 13‑20. label on the vehicle's sun visors on page 5‑11.
refer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.
The passenger sensing system will an older child riding in a booster

turn off the right front passenger seat; and children, who are large WARNING (Continued)
frontal airbag under certain enough, using safety belts.
conditions. The driver airbag is not passenger airbag inflates and the
We recommend that rear‐facing passenger seat is in a forward
affected by the passenger sensing child restraints not be transported in
system. position.
the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system Even if the passenger sensing
A label on your sun visor says, system has turned off the right
works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the right front passenger seat. The front passenger frontal airbag, no
the front.” This is because the risk to
sensors are designed to detect the system is fail-safe. No one can
the rear-facing child is so great,
presence of a properly-seated guarantee that an airbag will not
if the airbag deploys.
occupant and determine if the right deploy under some unusual
front passenger frontal airbag circumstance, even though the
should be enabled (may inflate) { WARNING airbag is turned off.
or not.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child
According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
children and infants are safer when injured or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a
properly restrained in a child passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in
restraint system or infant restraint This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
system secured in a rear seating rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
position. be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children be airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
secured in a rear seat, including: an child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
infant or a child riding in a injured or killed if the right front
rear-facing child restraint; a child (Continued)
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
If your vehicle does not have a rear

. The right front passenger seat is For some children who have
seat that will accommodate a occupied by a smaller person, outgrown child restraints and for
rear-facing child restraint, a such as a child who has very small adults, the passenger
rear-facing child restraint should not outgrown child restraints. sensing system may or may not
be installed in the vehicle, even if . Or, if there is a critical problem turn off the right front passenger's
the airbag is off. with the airbag system or the frontal airbag, depending upon the
The passenger sensing system is passenger sensing system. person's seating posture and body
designed to turn off the right front build. Everyone in your vehicle
When the passenger sensing who has outgrown child restraints
passenger airbag if: system has turned off the right front should wear a safety belt
. The right front passenger seat is passenger frontal airbag, the off properly — whether or not there is
unoccupied. indicator will light and stay lit to an airbag for that person.
remind you that the airbag is off.
. The system determines that an See Passenger Airbag Status
infant is present in a rear-facing Indicator on page 5‑11. { WARNING
infant seat.
The passenger sensing system is If the airbag readiness light ever
. The system determines that a designed to turn on (may inflate) the comes on and stays on, it means
small child is present in a child right front passenger frontal airbag that something may be wrong
restraint. anytime the system senses that a with the airbag system. To help
. The system determines that a person of adult size is sitting avoid injury to yourself or others,
small child is present in a properly in the right front passenger have the vehicle serviced right
booster seat. seat. When the passenger sensing away. See Airbag Readiness
system has allowed the airbag to be Light on page 5‑10 for more
. A right front passenger takes
enabled, the on indicator will light
his/her weight off of the seat for information, including important
and stay lit to remind you that the
a period of time. safety information.
airbag is active.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child 6. Restart the vehicle.
Child Restraint restraint and restarting the If the on indicator is still lit,
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
and the on indicator is lit: restraint in a rear seat position in
recline the vehicle seatback the vehicle and check with your
1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, dealer.
if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from If no rear seat is available, do
the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle. not install a child restraint in this
pushing the child restraint into
3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. vehicle and check with your
from the seat such as blankets, dealer.
Also make sure the child
cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under the
heaters, or seat massagers.
vehicle head restraint. If this
4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
following the directions provided restraint. See Head Restraints
by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Right
Front Seat Position) on
page 3‑59 or Securing Child
Restraints (Center Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑57 or
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat Position) on page 3‑54.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and Additional Factors Affecting
Adult‐Size Occupant enable the right front passenger System Operation
frontal airbag:
Safety belts help keep the
1. Turn the vehicle off. passenger in position on the seat
2. Remove any additional material during vehicle maneuvers and
from the seat, such as blankets, braking, which helps the passenger
cushions, seat covers, seat sensing system maintain the
heaters, or seat massagers. passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
3. Place the seatback in the fully in the Index for additional
upright position. information about the importance of
4. Have the person sit upright in proper restraint use.
the seat, centered on the seat If the shoulder portion of the belt is
cushion, with legs comfortably pulled out all the way, the child
extended. restraint locking feature will be
If a person of adult-size is sitting in 5. Restart the vehicle and have the engaged. This may unintentionally
the right front passenger seat, but person remain in this position for cause the passenger sensing
the off indicator is lit, it could be two to three minutes after the on system to turn the airbag off for
because that person is not sitting indicator is lit. some adult size occupants. If this
properly in the seat. If this happens, happens, let the belt go back all the
use the following steps to allow the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, Servicing the

such as a blanket or cushion,
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the
massagers can affect how well should be serviced. There are parts vehicle is turned off and the
the passenger sensing system of the airbag system in several battery is disconnected, an airbag
operates. We recommend that you places around the vehicle. Your can still inflate during improper
not use seat covers or other dealer and the service manual have service. You can be injured if you
aftermarket equipment except when information about servicing the are close to an airbag when it
approved by GM for your specific vehicle and the airbag system. To inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
page 3‑33 for more information Information on page 13‑18. proper service procedures, and
about modifications that can affect make sure the person performing
how the system operates. work for you is qualified to do so.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Adding Equipment to the system may not operate properly Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
if the original seat trim is Canada) on page 13‑4 or
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle replaced with non-GM covers, Customer Satisfaction
Q: Is there anything I might add upholstery or trim, or with Procedure (Mexico) on
to or change about the vehicle GM covers, upholstery or trim page 13‑4.
that could keep the airbags designed for a different vehicle. Q: Because I have a disability,
from working properly? Any object, such as an I have to get my vehicle
aftermarket seat heater or a modified. How can I find out
A: Yes. If you add things that
comfort enhancing pad or whether this will affect my
change the vehicle's frame,
device, installed under or on top airbag system?
bumper system, height, front end
of the seat fabric, could also
or side sheet metal, they may A: If you have questions, call
interfere with the operation of
keep the airbag system from Customer Assistance. The
the passenger sensing system.
working properly. Changing or phone numbers and addresses
This could either prevent proper
moving any parts of the front for Customer Assistance are in
deployment of the passenger
seats, safety belts, the airbag Step Two of the Customer
airbag(s) or prevent the
sensing and diagnostic module, Satisfaction Procedure in this
passenger sensing system from
steering wheel, instrument manual. See Customer
properly turning off the
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
passenger airbag(s). See
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Passenger Sensing System on
trim, front sensors, or airbag Customer Satisfaction
page 3‑27.
wiring can affect the operation of Procedure (Mexico) on
the airbag system. If you have any questions, call
Customer Assistance. The page 13‑4.
In addition, the vehicle may have
phone numbers and addresses In addition, your dealer and the
a passenger sensing system for
for Customer Assistance are in service manual have information
the right front passenger
Step Two of the Customer about the location of the airbag
position, which includes sensors
Satisfaction Procedure in this sensors, sensing and diagnostic
that are part of the passenger
manual. See Customer module and airbag wiring.
seat. The passenger sensing
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑10 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light on
damaged, opened, or broken, the may not work properly and
airbag may not work properly. Do may not protect you and your
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To
opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 3‑22. See your dealer for possible.
service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑13.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint might also slide under the lap
system secured in a rear seating belt. The belt force would then be
position. applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
In a crash, children who are not injuries. The shoulder belt should
buckled up can strike other people go over the shoulder and across
who are buckled up, or can be
the chest.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow two children to wear
safety belt with the shoulder belt
the same safety belt. The safety
behind their back. A child can be
belt cannot properly spread the
seriously injured by not wearing
impact forces. In a crash, the two
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
children can be crushed together
crash, the child would not be
and seriously injured. A safety
restrained by the shoulder belt.
belt must be used by only one
The child could move too far
person at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag arms. An infant should be
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride restraint.
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used in
or very close to, any airbag when a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low on
because an infant's neck is not the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, an the belt would apply force on a
infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury,
child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for
more information.
Children can be endangered in a In some areas of the United States Where to Put the
crash if the child restraint is not and Canada, Certified Child
properly secured in the vehicle. Passenger Safety Technicians
Restraint
When securing an add-on child (CPSTs) are available to inspect According to accident statistics,
restraint, refer to the instructions and demonstrate how to correctly children and infants are safer when
that come with the restraint which use and install child restraints. In properly restrained in a child
may be on the restraint itself or in a the U.S., refer to the National restraint system or infant restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Highway Traffic Safety system secured in a rear seating
The child restraint instructions are Administration (NHTSA) website to position.
important, so if they are not locate the nearest child safety seat
We recommend that children and
available, obtain a replacement inspection station. For CPST
child restraints be secured in a rear
copy from the manufacturer. availability in Canada, check with
seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Keep in mind that an unsecured riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
Ministry of Transportation office.
child restraint can move around in a a child riding in a forward-facing
collision or sudden stop and injure Securing the Child Within the child seat; an older child riding in a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to Child Restraint booster seat; and children, who are
properly secure any child restraint in large enough, using safety belts.
the vehicle— even when no child is
in it.
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front. This is because the risk to WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys. Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the
system, if equipped, has turned center front seat can be badly
off the right front passenger injured or killed by the frontal
{ WARNING frontal airbag, no system is airbags if they inflate. Never
A child in a rear-facing child fail-safe. No one can guarantee secure a child restraint in the
restraint can be seriously injured that an airbag will not deploy center front seat. It is always
or killed if the right front under some unusual better to secure a child restraint in
passenger airbag inflates. This is circumstance, even though a rear seat.
because the back of the it is turned off.
rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not use child restraints in the
be very close to the inflating in a rear seat, even if the center front seat position.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing airbag is off. If you secure a If the vehicle does not have rear
child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in seats, rear-facing child restraints
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move should not be installed in the
passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far vehicle, even if the passenger
passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to airbag is off.
position. secure the child restraint in a
The vehicle may have a rear seat.
passenger sensing system which See Passenger Sensing System
is designed to turn off the right on page 3‑27 for additional
front passenger frontal airbag information.
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
If a child in a forward-facing child Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and
restraint must be transported in a child restraint and the size of the
vehicle that does not have rear child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children
seats, the child restraint should be to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System)
secured in the right front seat assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child
position. See “Securing Child additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Restraints (Right Front Seat restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make
Position)” later in this section, for positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier.
instructions on how to install a child child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in
restraint in the right front seat interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the
position. safety belt. child restraint that are made for use
When securing a child restraint in a Wherever you install a child with the LATCH system.
rear seating position, study the restraint, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
instructions that came with the child restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed
restraint to make sure it is Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the
Child restraints and booster seats collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions
vary considerable in size, and some people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and
may fit in certain seating positions properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual.
better than others. Always make the vehicle, even when no child is When installing a child restraint with
sure the child restraint is properly in it. a top tether, you must also use
secured. either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
and attachments or top tether built into the vehicle. There are two of the child restraint to the vehicle.
anchors and attachments. lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built
seating position that will into the vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint
with lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether To assist in locating the lower
single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations anchors, place your hand in a
tether (C). Either will have a single palm-up position and reach up
attachment (B) to secure the top between the seat cushion and the
tether to the anchor. seatback.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. Extended Cab — Rear Seat
j (Lower Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
For crew cab models, there are j (Lower Anchor): Seating
exposed metal lower anchors for positions with two lower anchors.
each rear outboard seating position,
where the seatback meets the back For extended cab models with rear
of the seat cushion. seats, there are exposed metal
lower anchors for each rear seating
position, attached to the back wall,
near the seat cushion.
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, place your hand in a
palm-up position and reach up
between the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Some top tether anchors have

covers. To assist in locating the
covered top tether anchors, the top
tether anchor symbol is on the
cover.
Front Bench Seat — Regular

and Extended Cab without Rear
Seats
positions with top tether anchors.
Front Bucket Seats — Regular
and Extended Cab without Rear
Seats
positions with top tether anchors.
Crew Cab
The top tether anchors in a crew
cab model are on the back wall
behind each rear seating position.
Be sure to use an anchor on the

same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Regular and Extended Cab Regular and Extended Cab

without Rear Seats (Front Bucket without Rear Seats (Front
Seats) Bench Seat)
For regular and extended cab For regular and extended cab
Extended Cab — Rear Seat models without rear seats that have models without rear seats that have
The top tether anchors in an front bucket seats, there is a top a front bench seat, there are top
extended cab model are on the tether anchor behind a removable tether anchors behind removable
center of the back wall behind a cover on the back wall behind the covers on the back wall behind the
removable cover for the rear seating right front passenger seat. You may right front passenger seat and the
positions. Be sure to use an anchor have to pull the seatback forward to center front passenger seat. The
nearest to the seating position access the anchor. seatback may have to be pulled
where the child restraint will be forward to access the anchors.
placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint

position without a top tether anchor Designed for the LATCH { WARNING
if a national or local law requires System
that the top tether be attached, or if Do not attach more than one child
the instructions that come with the restraint to a single anchor.
child restraint say that the top tether { WARNING Attaching more than one child
must be attached. restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
According to accident statistics, not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break
children and infants are safer when restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
properly restrained in a child the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the
restraint system or infant restraint child could be seriously injured or
system secured in a rear seating risk of serious or fatal injuries
killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one
position. See Where to Put the restraint properly using the
Restraint on page 3‑41 for child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
additional information. belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
Crew Cab — Rear Seat Seats (Crew Cab) on

{ WARNING page 3‑8 or Rear Seats
(Extended Cab) on
Children can be seriously injured page 3‑8.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and 2.2. Route the top tether
the safety belt continues to according to your child
tighten. Buckle any unused safety restraint instructions and
belts behind the child restraint so the following instructions:
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
1. Put the child restraint on
Notice: Do not let the LATCH the seat.
attachments rub against the 2. If the child restraint
vehicle’s safety belts. This may manufacturer's instructions
damage these parts. If necessary, recommend that the top tether If the child restraint has a
move buckled safety belts to be attached, attach the top single tether, route the
avoid rubbing the LATCH tether to the top tether tether over the seatback.
attachments. anchor (A). Refer to the child
Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint instructions and the
with a safety belt buckled. This following steps:
could damage the safety belt or 2.1. Pull the seatback forward to
the seat. Unbuckle and return the access the top tether
safety belt to its stowed position, anchors (A). See Rear
before folding the seat.
2.4. Push rearward on the 3.1. Find the lower anchors for
seatback until it locks into the desired seating
its upright position. Push position.
and pull on the seatback to 3.2. Attach and tighten the lower
make sure it is secured attachments on the child
properly. restraint to the lower
3. Attach and tighten the lower anchors.
attachments to the lower 4. Tighten the top tether.
anchors. If the child restraint
If the child restraint has a does not have lower 5. Before placing a child in the
dual tether, route the tether attachments or the desired child restraint, make sure it is
over the seatback. seating position does not have securely held in place. To check,
2.3. Attach the top tether to the lower anchors, secure the child grasp the child restraint at the
anchor (A). Make sure that restraint with the top tether and LATCH path and attempt to
you secure the top tether to the safety belts. Refer to your move it side to side and back
the top tether anchor and child restraint manufacturer and forth. There should be no
not to the seatback instructions and the instructions more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
latch (B). in this manual. movement for proper installation.
Extended Cab — Rear Seat 1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
for the desired seating recommends that the top tether
position. be attached, attach and tighten
1.2. Put the child restraint on the top tether to the top tether
the seat. anchor (C). Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the
1.3. Attach the lower following steps:
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors (D) in the vehicle.
The child restraint
instructions will show
you how.
1. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child 2.1. Pull on the finger access
restraint with the top tether and tab to remove the cover to
the safety belts. Refer to your access the top tether
child restraint manufacturer anchors (C).
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
2.2. Route the top tether (A) Right Front Seat — Regular/ 2. If the child restraint
through the loop (B) at the Extended Cab without Rear manufacturer's instructions
top of the seatback to Seats recommend that the top tether
attach the top tether to the be attached, attach and tighten
nearest top tether The vehicle has a right front the top tether to the top tether
anchor (C). passenger airbag and may also anchor. Refer to the child
have a passenger sensing system. restraint instructions and the
3. Tighten the lower anchor If the vehicle has a passenger
attachments and the top tether. following steps:
sensing system it is designed to turn
The child restraint instructions off the right front passenger frontal 2.1. Pull the seatback forward to
will show you how. airbag when an infant in a access the top tether
4. Before placing a child in the rear-facing infant seat or a small anchor. See Seatback
child restraint, make sure it is child in a forward-facing child Latches on page 3‑6.
securely held in place. To check, restraint or booster seat is detected. 2.2. Pull on the finger access
grasp the child restraint at the See “Securing Child Restraints tab to remove the cover to
LATCH path and attempt to (Right Front Seat Position)” later in access the top tether
move it side to side and back this section and Passenger Sensing anchor.
and forth. There should be no System on page 3‑27 for important
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of safety information and additional
movement for proper installation. information on installing a child
restraint in the right front seat
position.
1. See “Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat Position)” later
in this section for instructions on
installing the child restraint using
the safety belts.
2.3. Route the top tether

according to your child
restraint instructions and
the following instructions:
If the position you are using If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest has a fixed or adjustable
or head restraint and you headrest or head restraint
are using a single tether, and you are using a dual
raise the headrest or head tether, route the tether
If the position you are using restraint and route the around the headrest or
has a fixed headrest or tether under the headrest or head restraint.
head restraint and you are head restraint and in 3. Attach and tighten the top tether
using a single tether, route between the headrest or according to your child restraint
the tether over the headrest head restraint posts. instructions.
or head restraint.
4. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Center Front Seat — Regular/ Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Extended Cab without Rear Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat Position)
Seats
When securing a child restraint in a
For vehicles without rear seats,
manufacturers are required to
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
provide top tether anchors for all A crash can damage the LATCH child restraint to make sure it is
non-driver seating positions and system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
instructions for using those anchors. LATCH system may not properly
Even if a top tether anchor is secure the child restraint, If your child restraint has the LATCH
available, you should not install a resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
child restraint in the center front Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
seat position. See Where to Put the System) on page 3‑43 for how to
sure the LATCH system is
Restraint on page 3‑41 for important install your child restraint using
working properly after a crash, LATCH. If you secure a child
safety information and additional see your dealer to have the
information on installing a child restraint using a safety belt and it
system inspected and any uses a top tether, see Lower
restraint in the center front seat
necessary replacements made as Anchors and Tethers for Children
position. See “Securing Child
soon as possible. (LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for
Restraints (Center Front Seat
Position)” later in this section for top tether anchor locations.
instructions on installing the child If the vehicle has the LATCH system
restraint using the safety belts and and it was being used during a
top tether anchor. crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Do not secure a child restraint in a If you need to install more than one
position without a top tether anchor child restraint in the rear seat, be
if a national or local law requires sure to read Where to Put the
that the top tether be anchored, or if Restraint on page 3‑41.
the instructions that come with the 1. Put the child restraint on
child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
In Canada, the law requires that the lap and shoulder portions of
forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle's safety belt through
a top tether, and that the tether be or around the restraint. The child
attached. restraint instructions will show
If your child restraint does not have you how.
the LATCH system, you will be 3. Push the latch plate into the
using the safety belt to secure the buckle until it clicks.
child restraint in this position. Make sure the release button is
Be sure to follow the instructions positioned so you would be able
that came with the child restraint. to unbuckle the safety belt
Secure the child in the child restraint quickly if necessary.
when and as the instructions say.
7. Tighten the top tether. See

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑43.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down there should be no more than
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to To remove the child restraint,
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back and let it go back all the way. If the
5. If your child restraint has a top into the retractor. When installing top tether is attached to a top tether
tether, attach the top tether to a forward-facing child restraint, it anchor, disconnect it.
the top tether anchor. See Lower may be helpful to use your knee
Anchors and Tethers for to push down on the child
Children (LATCH System) on restraint as you tighten the belt.
page 3‑43. Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 6.
Securing Child Restraints If the vehicle does not have rear

(Center Front Seat
{ WARNING seats, rear-facing child restraints
should not be installed in the
Position) A child in a child restraint in the vehicle, even if the passenger
center front seat can be badly airbag is off.
For vehicles without rear seats, injured or killed by the frontal
manufacturers are required to airbags if they inflate. Never If a child in a forward-facing child
provide top tether anchors for all secure a child restraint in the restraint must be transported in a
non-driver seating positions and vehicle that does not have rear
center front seat. It is always
instructions for using those anchors. seats, the child restraint should be
better to secure a child restraint in
Even if a top tether anchor is secured in the right front seat
available, you should not install a a rear seat.
position. See “Securing Child
child restraint in the center front Restraints (Right Front Seat
seating position. In addition, some larger child Position)” later in this section, for
restraints, if installed in the center instructions on how to install a child
front seating position, may interfere restraint in the right front seat
with access to the driver and right position.
front passenger safety belt buckles. Do not secure a child seat in a
See Safety Belts on page 3‑11 for position without a top tether anchor
information, including warnings, if a national or local law requires
about the importance of safety that the top tether be anchored.
belt use.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward‐facing child restraints have
attached.
The lap belt would be used to 5. If the child restraint manufacturer

secure a child restraint in this recommends using a top tether
position, following the instructions anchor, attach the top tether on
that came with the child restraint. the child restraint to the top
1. Adjust the driver seat to the tether anchor on the vehicle.
desired position. Fold the Route the top tether according to
armrest up, if equipped. the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
2. Move the passenger seat so that
the seat and seatback are
aligned with the driver seat and
seatback positions. See Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 or
Power Seat Adjustment on 5.3. Attach the top tether to the
page 3‑3 and Reclining slots in the back panel as
Seatbacks on page 3‑4 for more shown.
information. Do not tighten the top tether
3. Make the center position lap belt at this time.
as long as possible by tilting the 6. Pick up the latch plate on the
latch plate and pulling it along center position lap safety belt,
the belt. and run the lap safety belt
4. Place the child restraint on 5.1. Pull on the finger access through the restraint. The child
the seat. tab to remove the cover to restraint instructions will show
access the top tether you how.
anchor.
5.2. Route the top tether over
the center seatback or
folding armrest, if equipped.
7. Push the latch plate into the 10. Before placing a child in the Securing Child Restraints
buckle until it clicks. Position the child restraint, make sure it is
release button on the buckle so securely held in place. To
(Right Front Seat
that the safety belt can be check, grasp the child restraint Position)
unbuckled. at the safety belt path and This vehicle has airbags. A rear
8. Tighten the center position lap attempt to move it side to side seat is a safer place to secure a
belt by pulling on the loose end and back and forth. When the forward-facing child restraint. See
of the belt. It may be helpful to child restraint is properly Where to Put the Restraint on
use your knee to push down on installed, there should be no page 3‑41.
the child restraint as you tighten more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement. In addition, the vehicle may have a
the belt. passenger sensing system which is
9. Tighten the top tether. Follow the To remove the child restraint, designed to turn off the right front
child restraint manufacturer's unbuckle the vehicle safety belt. passenger's frontal airbag under
instructions. If the top tether is attached to the certain conditions. See Passenger
top tether anchor, disconnect it and Sensing System on page 3‑27 and
reinstall the top tether anchor cover. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑11 for more information
on this, including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says, If the vehicle does not have a rear
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) seat that will accommodate a
the front.” This is because the risk to rear-facing child restraint, a child
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing restraint should not be installed in
if the airbag deploys. system, if equipped, has turned your vehicle, even if the airbag
off the right front passenger is off.
frontal airbag, no system is
{ WARNING fail-safe. No one can guarantee If your child restraint has the LATCH
that an airbag will not deploy system, see Lower Anchors and
A child in a rear-facing child Tethers for Children (LATCH
restraint can be seriously injured under some unusual
System) on page 3‑43 for how and
or killed if the right front circumstance, even though
where to install your child restraint
passenger airbag inflates. This is it is turned off. using LATCH. If a child restraint is
because the back of the Secure rear-facing child restraints secured using a safety belt and it
rear-facing child restraint would in a rear seat, even if the uses a top tether, see Lower
be very close to the inflating airbag is off. If you secure a Anchors and Tethers for Children
airbag. A child in a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint in (LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for
child restraint can be seriously the right front seat, always move top tether anchor locations.
injured or killed if the right front the front passenger seat as far Do not secure a child seat in a
passenger airbag inflates and the back as it will go. It is better to position without a top tether anchor
passenger seat is in a forward secure the child restraint in a if a national or local law requires
position. rear seat. that the top tether be anchored, or if
The vehicle may have a the instructions that come with the
See Passenger Sensing System
passenger sensing system which child restraint say that the top strap
on page 3‑27 for additional must be anchored.
is designed to turn off the right information.
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
the seat. buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the lap and shoulder portions of the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
the vehicle's safety belt through could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor.
or around the restraint. The child if necessary. 6. If the vehicle does not have a
restraint instructions will show rear seat and the child restraint
you how. manufacturer recommends using
a top tether anchor, attach the
top tether to the top tether
anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑43.
8. Tighten the top tether. See If a child restraint has been installed
Lower Anchors and Tethers for and on indicator is lit, see “If the On
Children (LATCH System) on Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”
page 3‑43. under Passenger Sensing System
9. Before placing a child in the on page 3‑27 for more information.
child restraint, make sure it is To remove the child restraint,
securely held in place. To check, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
grasp the child restraint at the let it return to the stowed position.
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
7. To tighten the belt, push down there should be no more than
on the child restraint, pull the 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
shoulder portion of the belt to If the vehicle is equipped with the
tighten the lap portion of the belt, passenger sensing system, and
and feed the shoulder belt back when the passenger sensing system
into the retractor. When installing has turned off the right front
a forward-facing child restraint, it passenger frontal airbag, the off
may be helpful to use your knee indicator on the passenger airbag
to push down on the child status indicator should light and stay
restraint as you tighten the belt. lit when you start the vehicle. See
Try to pull the belt out of the Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
retractor to make sure the on page 5‑11.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 7.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage For vehicles that are an extended

cab or crew cab model, the vehicle
Compartments also has two rear cupholders. On
crew cab models, the cupholders
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box are located at the front end of the
rear center seat cushion. The
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lift up on the glove box lever to cupholder can be removed for
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 open it. cleaning by pressing the tab below
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
the cupholder and sliding the
Cupholders cupholder forward.
This vehicle may have On extended cab models, the rear
two cupholders located on the lower seat cupholders are located on top
part of the front doors as well as of the rear center console.
two cupholders located at the front
Vehicles with ashtrays will use one
end of the console. Vehicles with
of the cupholders.
bench seats may have cupholders
attached to the front of the
center seat.
4-2 Storage
Rear Storage
Extended cab models might have
storage compartments under the
rear seats.
Lift the lid from the center area to

To open a storage box, unhook the access the storage box.
bottom and lift the latches on each
side of the storage box. Center Console Storage
For vehicles with bench seats, there
may be a center armrest storage
To access the storage area. Lift up on the upper tab
compartments, lift the cushion on located at the front of the armrest to
the bottom of the rear seats. This release the latch to open.
exposes the storage boxes under For vehicles with bucket seats or
the seat. uplevel packages, the vehicle may
have a two-tiered center armrest
storage area. Lift up on the upper or
lower tab at the front of the armrest
to open the upper or lower
storage area.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Engine Coolant Temperature
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Vehicle Messages

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-10
Passenger Airbag Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-23
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Engine Cooling System
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-24
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-25
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-25
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Indicators StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-17 Ride Control System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-17 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-26
Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . 5-6 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-27
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls To adjust: Windshield Wiper/Washer

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
Steering Wheel the lever toward you.
Adjustment 2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on the steering wheel pad.
The windshield wiper controls are
located on the turn signal/lane
change lever. They are controlled by
turning the band with this z
The steering wheel adjustment lever
is located on the left side of the symbol.
steering wheel. The windshield wipers work in all
ignition positions, except LOCK/
OFF. This includes the Retained
Access Power mode. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑31.
Move the band to one of the Windshield Washer Compass Calibration

following positions:
The compass may need
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, move { WARNING calibration if:
the band to 8 and then release it. . CAL is displayed while driving in
In freezing weather, do not use
For several wipes, hold the band on the vehicle.
the washer until the windshield is
8 longer. warmed. Otherwise the washer . After approximately five seconds,
N (Adjustable Interval Wipes): fluid can form ice on the the display does not show a
For adjustable interval wipes, turn windshield, blocking your vision. compass heading, N for North,
the band up for more frequent wipes for example, there may be a
or down for less frequent wipes. strong magnetic field interfering
Q L (Washer Fluid): Push the
6 (Low Speed): For slow paddle on top of the multifunction
with the compass. Interference
wipes, turn the band to the first solid can be caused by a magnetic
lever to spray washer fluid on the
position past the delay settings. antenna mount, magnetic note
windshield. The wipers will clear the
pad holder, or a similar
1 (High Speed): For fast wipes, window and then either stop or
magnetic item.
turn the band to the second solid return to your preset speed.
position past the delay settings. . The compass does not display
Compass the correct heading and the
9 (Off): Use to turn the wipers off. compass zone variance is set
Clear snow and ice from the wiper Compass Operation correctly.
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or Press Y b or depending on the To calibrate, CAL must be displayed
in the mirror compass windows.
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades mirror, press O once to turn the
If CAL is not displayed, press and
should be replaced. display on or off.
hold Y b / O for several seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by Clock

driving the vehicle in circles at
8 km/h (5 mph) or less until the AM-FM Radio
display reads a direction. Press and hold HR until the correct
Compass Variance hour displays. Press and hold MN
until the correct minute displays.
The mirror is set to zone eight. There is an initial two-second delay
If you do not live in zone eight or before the clock goes into time-set
drive out of the area, the compass mode. To display the time with the
variance needs to be changed to ignition off, press RCL, HR, or MN.
the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance:
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
1. Find the current location and 2. Press and hold Y b / O until Z Press and hold the HR button until
and/or a zone number displays. the correct hour displays. Press and
variance zone number on the
hold the MN button until the correct
following zone map. 3. Press Y b / O repeatedly until minute displays. The time can be
the new zone number displays. set with the ignition on or off.
After you stop pressing the
button, the display shows a To synchronize the time with an
compass direction within a FM station broadcasting Radio Data
few seconds. System (RDS) information, press
and hold the HR and MN buttons at
the same time until RDS TIME
displays. To accept this time, press
and hold the HR and MN buttons, at
the same time, for another
two seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO
UPDAT (update) displays.
RDS time is broadcast once a Notice: Leaving electrical Notice: Hanging heavy
minute. After tuning to an RDS equipment plugged in for an equipment from the power outlet
broadcast station, it could take a extended period of time while the can cause damage not covered
few minutes for the time to update. vehicle is off will drain the by the vehicle warranty. The
battery. Always unplug electrical power outlets are designed for
Power Outlets equipment when not in use and accessory power plugs only, such
do not plug in equipment that as cell phone charge cords.
The accessory power outlets can be exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
rating. Cigarette Lighter
Certain electrical accessories may To use the lighter, press it in all the
The vehicle may have an accessory not be compatible with the
power outlet located below the way, and let go. When it is ready, it
accessory power outlet and could will pop back out by itself.
climate control system and on the overload vehicle and adapter fuses.
rear of the center console. Remove If a problem is experienced, see Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
the cover to access and replace your dealer. in while it is heating does not let
when not in use. the lighter back away from the
When adding electrical equipment, heating element when it is hot.
be sure to follow the proper
{ WARNING installation instructions included with
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
Power is always supplied to the the equipment. See Add-On element, or a fuse could be
outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑67. blown. Do not hold a cigarette
equipment plugged in when the lighter in while it is heating.
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, to do. Follow this manual's advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly
The vehicle may have a removable Gauges, and and even dangerous.
ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Indicators Chime Level Adjustment
The ashtray is located in the center
console area. The ashtray can be Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong The radio is used to adjust the
removed for cleaning. When the
before it becomes serious enough vehicle's chime level. To change the
ashtray is removed, this area can
to cause an expensive repair or volume level of the chime, press
also be used as a cupholder.
replacement. Paying attention to the and hold pushbutton 6 with the
Notice: If papers, pins, or other warning lights and gauges could ignition on and the radio power off.
flammable items are put in the prevent injury. The volume level will change from
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other the normal level to loud, and LOUD
smoking materials could ignite Warning lights come on when there will appear on the radio display. To
them and possibly damage the could be a problem with a vehicle change back to the default or
vehicle. Never put flammable function. Some warning lights come normal setting, press and hold
items in the ashtray. on briefly when the engine is started pushbutton 6 again. The volume
to indicate they are working. level will change from the loud level
Gauges can indicate when there to normal, and NORMAL will appear
could be a problem with a vehicle on the radio display. Each time the
function. Often gauges and warning chime volume is changed, three
lights work together to indicate a chimes will sound to indicate the
problem with the vehicle. new volume selected. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a
When one of the warning lights factory radio or chime module will
comes on and stays on while disable vehicle chimes.
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
Instrument Cluster
English Automatic Transmission 2.9L Shown, Metric, Manual Transmission, 3.7L and 5.3L Similar
Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The vehicle has a trip odometer that
vehicle's speed in either kilometers indicates how far the vehicle has
per hour (km/h) or miles per been driven since the trip odometer
hour (mph). was last set to zero.
See “Trip Odometer” under Driver
Odometer Information Center (DIC) on
The odometer shows how far the page 5‑20 for more information.
vehicle has been driven, in either
miles (used in the United States) or Tachometer
kilometers (used in Canada). The tachometer displays the engine
The odometer mileage can be speed in revolutions per
checked without the vehicle running minute (rpm).
by pressing the trip information Notice: If the engine is operated When the ignition is on, the fuel
stem. See “Odometer” under Driver with the tachometer in the shaded gauge shows how much fuel the
Information Center (DIC) on warning area, the vehicle could vehicle has remaining in the
page 5‑20 for more information. be damaged, and the damages fuel tank.
If the cluster is replaced the new would not be covered by the An arrow on the fuel gauge
one will automatically detect and vehicle warranty. Do not operate indicates the side of the vehicle the
update the vehicle's accumulated the engine with the tachometer in fuel door is on.
mileage. the shaded warning area.
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant See Engine Overheating on
owners ask about. None of these page 10‑23 for more information.
indicate a problem with the vehicle's
Temperature Gauge
fuel gauge: Safety Belt Reminders
. At the gas station, the gas pump Driver Safety Belt Reminder
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
Light
. It takes a little more or less fuel When the engine is started, a chime
to fill up than the gauge sounds for several seconds to
indicated. For example, the remind a driver to fasten the safety
gauge may have indicated the belt, unless the driver safety belt is
tank was half full, but it actually already buckled.
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while This gauge shows the engine
turning a corner or speeding up. coolant temperature.
. The gauge does not go back to If the gauge pointer is near the top
empty when the ignition is of the gauge, the engine is too hot. The safety belt light comes on and
turned off. It means that the engine coolant has stays on for several seconds, then
overheated. If the vehicle has been flashes for several more.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low,
operating under normal driving
a LOW FUEL message will display
conditions, pull the vehicle off the
on the Driver Information
road, stop the vehicle and turn off
Center (DIC). See Fuel System
the engine as soon as possible.
Messages on page 5‑25 for more
information.
This chime and light are repeated if Airbag Readiness Light

the driver remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion. If the driver The system checks the airbag's
safety belt is already buckled, electrical system for possible
neither the chime nor the light malfunctions. If the light stays on it
comes on. indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes
Passenger Safety Belt This chime and light are repeated if the airbag sensor(s), passenger
Reminder Light the passenger remains unbuckled sensing system, the pretensioners,
and the vehicle is in motion. the airbag modules, the wiring, and
For vehicles equipped with the
If the passenger safety belt is the crash sensing and diagnostic
passenger safety belt reminder light,
buckled, neither the chime nor the module. For more information on the
several seconds after the engine is
light comes on. airbag system, see Airbag System
started, a chime sounds for
on page 3‑20.
several seconds to remind the front The front passenger safety belt
passenger to buckle their safety warning light and chime may turn on
belt. The passenger safety belt light, if an object is put on the seat such
located on the instrument panel, as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
comes on and stays on for bag, laptop or other electronic
several seconds and then flashes device. To turn off the warning light
for several more. and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt. The airbag readiness light flashes
for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status

{ WARNING Indicator
If the airbag readiness light stays If the vehicle has one of the
on after the vehicle is started or passenger airbag status indicators
comes on while driving, it means pictured in the following illustrations,
the airbag system might not be then the vehicle has a passenger
working properly. The airbags in United States
sensing system for the right front
the vehicle might not inflate in a passenger position. The passenger
crash, or they could even inflate airbag status indicator is on the
without a crash. To help avoid instrument panel. See Passenger
injury, have the vehicle serviced Sensing System on page 3‑27 for
right away. important safety information.
In addition, if the vehicle has a
If there is a problem with the airbag passenger sensing system for the Canada and Mexico
system, an airbag Driver Information right front passenger position, the When the vehicle is started, the
Center (DIC) message can also label on the vehicle's sun visors passenger airbag status indicator
come on. See Vehicle Messages on refer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
page 5‑23 for more information. for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is If it does not, have the vehicle

lit on the passenger airbag status { WARNING serviced by your dealer.
indicator, it means that the right The light should go out once the
front passenger frontal airbag is If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means engine starts. If it stays on,
enabled (may inflate). or comes on while driving, there
that something may be wrong
If the word OFF or the off symbol is with the airbag system. To help could be a problem with the
lit on the airbag status indicator, it avoid injury to yourself or others, charging system. A charging system
means that the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right message in the Driver Information
system has turned off the right front Center (DIC) can also appear. See
away. See Airbag Readiness
passenger frontal airbag. Battery Voltage and Charging
Light on page 5‑10 for more
If, after several seconds, both status Messages on page 5‑23 for more
information, including important information. This light could indicate
indicator lights remain on, or if there safety information.
are no lights at all, there may be a that there are problems with a
problem with the lights or the generator drive belt, or that there is
passenger sensing system. See Charging System Light an electrical problem. Have it
your dealer for service. checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
This light comes on briefly when the

ignition key is turned to START, but
the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by vehicle warranty. This could also
the system before any problem is result in a failure to pass a
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light required Emission Inspection/
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage Maintenance test. See
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system assists Accessories and Modifications on
Generation) monitors the operation the service technician in correctly page 10‑4.
of the vehicle to ensure emissions diagnosing any malfunction. This light comes on during a
are at acceptable levels, to produce Notice: If the vehicle is malfunction in one of two ways:
a cleaner environment. This light continually driven with this light
comes on when the vehicle is Light Flashing: A misfire condition
on, the emission controls might has been detected. A misfire
placed in ON/RUN, as a check to not work as well, the vehicle fuel
show it is working. If it does not, increases vehicle emissions and
economy might not be as good, could damage the emission control
have the vehicle serviced by your and the engine might not run as
dealer. See Ignition Positions on system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
smoothly. This could lead to and service might be required.
page 9‑26 for more information. costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
intake, or fuel system of the . Avoid hard accelerations.
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the
If the malfunction indicator lamp Performance Criteria (TPC) can
comes on and stays on while the amount of cargo being hauled as
affect the vehicle's emission soon as it is possible.
engine is running, this indicates that controls and can cause this light
there is an OBD II problem and to come on. Modifications to
service is required. these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
If the light continues to flash, stop

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
and park the vehicle. Turn the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, the engine not to run as
and restart the engine. If the light is efficiently as designed and may Some local governments may have
still flashing, follow the previous cause stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the on-vehicle
steps and see your dealer for stalling when the vehicle is emission control equipment. For the
service as soon as possible. changed into gear, misfiring, inspection, the emission system test
hesitation on acceleration, equipment is connected to the
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration. vehicle’s Data Link
control system malfunction has These conditions might go away Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be
required. If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
The following may correct an It will require at least one full tank of
emission system malfunction: the proper fuel to turn the light off.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully See Recommended Fuel on
installed. See Filling the Tank on page 9‑53.
page 9‑55. The diagnostic The DLC is under the instrument
system can determine if the fuel If none of the above have made the panel to the left of the steering
cap has been left off or light turn off, your dealer can check wheel. See your dealer if assistance
improperly installed. A loose or the vehicle. The dealer has the is needed.
missing fuel cap allows fuel to proper test equipment and
evaporate into the atmosphere. diagnostic tools to fix any
A few driving trips with the cap mechanical or electrical problems
properly installed should turn the that might have developed.
light off.
The vehicle may not pass If this has been done and the
inspection if: vehicle still does not pass the
. The malfunction indicator lamp is inspection for lack of OBD II
on with the engine running, or if system readiness, your dealer
the light does not come on when can prepare the vehicle for
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN inspection.
while the engine is off. See your English Metric
dealer for assistance in verifying Brake System Warning
This light comes on briefly when the
proper operation of the Light ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
malfunction indicator lamp.
The vehicle brake system consists If it does not, have it fixed so it will
. The OBD II (On-Board of two hydraulic circuits. If one be ready to warn if there is a
Diagnostics) system determines circuit is not working, the remaining problem.
that critical emission control circuit can still work to stop the When the ignition is on, the brake
systems have not been vehicle. For normal braking system warning light comes on
completely diagnosed. The performance, both circuits need to when the parking brake is set. See
vehicle would be considered not be working Parking Brake on page 9‑45 for
ready for inspection. This can
If the warning light comes on, there more information. The light stays on
happen if the 12-volt battery has
could be a brake problem. Have the if the parking brake does not
recently been replaced or run
brake system inspected right away. release fully. If it stays on after the
down. The diagnostic system is
parking brake is fully released, it
designed to evaluate critical
means there is a brake problem.
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If the light comes on while driving, Antilock Brake System If the ABS light stays on, turn the
pull off the road and stop. The brake ignition off. If the light comes on
pedal might be harder to push, or it
(ABS) Warning Light while driving, stop as soon as it is
might go closer to the floor. It can safely possible and turn the ignition
take longer to stop. If the light is still off. A chime may also sound when
on, have the vehicle towed for the light comes on steady. Then
service. See Towing the Vehicle on start the engine again to reset the
page 10‑91. system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
{ WARNING The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not
The brake system might not be light comes on briefly when the on, the vehicle still has brakes, but
working properly if the brake engine is started. not antilock brakes. If the regular
system warning light is on. If the light does not come on, have it brake system warning light is also
Driving with the brake system fixed so it will be ready to warn if on, the vehicle does not have
warning light on can lead to a there is a problem. antilock brakes and there is a
crash. If the light is still on after problem with the regular brakes.
the vehicle has been pulled off See Brake System Warning Light on
the road and carefully stopped, page 5‑15.
have the vehicle towed for See Driver Information Center (DIC)
service. on page 5‑20 for all brake related
DIC messages.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System The light flashes while the
StabiliTrak system and TCS are
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light working to assist the driver with
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions.
If the StabiliTrak system and TCS
light comes on and stays on while
driving and a TRACTION FAULT or
This light comes on briefly while SERVICE STAB SYS message
starting the engine. If it does not, displays on the DIC, the vehicle
The StabiliTrak and Traction Control needs service.
have the vehicle serviced by your System (TCS) indicator/warning light
dealer. comes on briefly while starting the See StabiliTrak® System on
This light comes on when the engine. page 9‑48, Traction Control System
StabiliTrak system is turned off. (TCS) on page 9‑47 and Ride
If it does not, have the vehicle Control System Messages on
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction serviced by your dealer. If the
Control System (TCS) is also off. page 5‑26 for more information.
system is working normally the
If the TCS is off, the system does indicator light then goes off.
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
systems and the warning light
turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑47 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑48 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light A Driver Information Center (DIC) Engine Oil Pressure Light
tire pressure message may also
display. See Vehicle Messages on
Stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the tires to the pressure value
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire Pressure
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light When the Light Flashes First and { WARNING
comes on briefly when the engine is Then Is On Steady
Do not keep driving if the oil
started. It provides information If the light flashes for about a minute pressure is low. The engine can
about tire pressures and the TPMS. and then stays on, there may be a become so hot that it catches fire.
When the Light Is On Steady problem with the TPMS. If the Someone could be burned. Check
problem is not corrected, the light the oil as soon as possible and
This indicates that one or more of will come on at every ignition cycle.
the tires are significantly have the vehicle serviced.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
underinflated. Operation on page 10‑57 for more
information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Security Light Cruise Control Light
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but
if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil For information regarding this light The cruise control light comes on
pressure is still low, have the and the vehicle's security system, whenever the cruise control is set.
vehicle serviced. Always follow see Anti-theft Alarm System on The light goes out when the cruise
the maintenance schedule for page 2‑10. control is turned off. See Cruise
changing engine oil. Control on page 9‑50 for more
High-Beam On Light information.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through This light comes on when the
the engine properly. The vehicle high-beam headlamps are in use.
could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Information Displays such as the odometer and trip

odometer, engine oil life reset, and
To reset the trip odometer, press
and hold the reset stem until the
personalization features that are display returns to zero.
Driver Information explained in the following
Center (DIC) information. The DIC trip odometer Engine Oil Life System
reset stem is located on the With the engine off, turn the key to
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
instrument panel cluster next to the ON/RUN and then press the reset
displays information such as the trip
DIC display. stem until OIL LIFE RESET
odometer, personalization features,
and warning messages. The DIC appears — alternating between OIL
Trip Information LIFE and RESET — on the DIC
display is located on the instrument
panel cluster. Odometer display. The CHANGE OIL message
alerts you to change the oil on a
The odometer is automatically
Operation and Displays schedule consistent with your
displayed on the DIC when you start driving conditions. Always reset the
The Driver Information Center (DIC) the vehicle. The odometer shows OIL LIFE message after an oil
comes on when the ignition is on. the total distance the vehicle has change. To reset the message, see
If a problem is detected, a warning been driven in either miles for the Engine Oil Life System on
message appears on the display. United States or kilometers for page 10‑12.
Pressing and releasing the trip Canada.
In addition to the engine oil life
odometer reset stem on the DIC Trip Odometer system monitoring the oil life,
acknowledges some current
Press and release the reset stem additional maintenance is
warnings or service messages.
until TRIP appears on the DIC recommended in the Maintenance
Some messages only clear after the
display. The trip odometer shows Schedule in this manual. See
required action has been taken.
the current distance traveled since Engine Oil on page 10‑10 and
The DIC has different menu items the last reset of the trip odometer in Maintenance Schedule on
which can be accessed by pressing either miles for the United States or page 11‑3 for more information.
the trip odometer reset stem on the kilometers for Canada.
DIC. This includes trip information,
Personalization Features 6. To exit the language selection, 4. Once the desired mode is shown
momentarily press and release on the DIC display, briefly press
Language the reset stem. All DIC the reset stem to set your
This feature allows you to choose messages will now display choice. The DIC display then
the language in which the DIC in the language selected. clears.
display shows information. The following are the available
Automatic Door Locks
To set your choice for this feature: modes:
This feature allows you to program
1. With the engine off, turn the key the door locks to a preferred setting. Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with
to ON/RUN, but do not start the an automatic transmission, this
To set your choice for this feature: mode locks all of the doors when
engine.
1. With the engine off, turn the key the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)
2. Close all doors so the DOORS
to LOCK/OFF. Do not remove and unlocks all of the doors when
message does not display in
the key from the ignition. the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
the DIC.
2. Press and hold the power door On vehicles with a manual
3. Momentarily press and release
lock button until the DIC display transmission, this mode locks all of
the reset stem until the current
shows the current door the doors when the vehicle speed is
language is displayed: English
lock mode. greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) and
(default), Spanish, or French.
3. To view the next available mode, unlocks all of the doors when the
4. To select a different language, key is removed from the ignition.
press and hold the reset stem
press and hold the reset stem
until the mode appears. Release
until the next language appears.
the reset stem and press and
5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired hold again to view the
language is displayed. Once the next mode.
desired language is shown on
the DIC display, the language
is set.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The following are the available
automatic transmission, this mode Feedback modes:
locks all of the doors when the This feature allows you to program RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the parking lamps when you press
unlocks the driver's door when the feedback to a preferred setting. the lock or unlock buttons on the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park). RKE transmitter.
To set your choice for this feature:
On vehicles with a manual RFA 2: This mode flashes the
transmission, this mode locks all of 1. With the engine off, turn the key
to LOCK/OFF. Do not remove parking lamps and sounds the horn
the doors when the vehicle speed is when you press the lock button on
greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) and the key from the ignition.
the RKE transmitter. This mode also
unlocks the driver's door when the 2. Press and hold the lock and flashes the parking lamps when you
key is removed from the ignition. unlock buttons on the RKE press the unlock button on the RKE
Lock 3: On vehicles with an transmitter at the same time. transmitter.
automatic transmission, this mode Hold both buttons until the DIC
display shows the current RKE RFA 3: This mode flashes the
locks all of the doors when the parking lamps and sounds the horn
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). feedback mode.
when you press the lock or unlock
The doors will not automatically 3. To view the next available mode, buttons on the RKE transmitter.
unlock. press and hold the reset stem
until the mode appears. Release RFA 4: This mode disables RKE
On vehicles with a manual feedback. There will be no feedback
transmission, this mode locks all of the reset stem and press and
hold again to view the when you press the lock or unlock
the doors when the vehicle speed is buttons on the RKE transmitter.
greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). The next mode.
doors will not automatically unlock. 4. Once the desired mode is shown
on the DIC display, briefly press
the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then
clears.
Vehicle Messages The following are the possible Brake System Messages
messages that can be displayed
Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them. ABS (Antilock Brake System)
to notify the driver that the status of FAULT
the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and This message displays if there is a
some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Charging Messages problem with the Antilock Brake
Multiple messages may appear one System (ABS). Check the ABS as
SERVICE CHARG (Charge) soon as possible and have your
after another. The messages are SYS (System)
displayed for several seconds each. vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
This message displays if there is a Braking on page 9‑4 and Antilock
Some messages may not require problem with the battery charging Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
immediate action, but you should system. Under certain conditions, on page 5‑16 for more information.
press and release the trip odometer the battery warning light may also Press and release the reset stem to
reset stem to acknowledge that you turn on in the instrument panel acknowledge the message and
received the messages and to clear cluster. See Charging System Light clear it from the display.
them from the display. Each on page 5‑12. The battery will not
message must be acknowledged BRAKES
be charging at an optimal rate and
individually. the vehicle will lose the ability to This message displays if there is a
Some messages cannot be cleared enter the fuel economy mode. The problem with the brakes. Check the
from the DIC display because they vehicle is safe to drive, however brakes as soon as possible and
are more urgent. These messages have the electrical system checked have your vehicle serviced by your
require action before they can be by your dealer. Press and release dealer. See Braking on page 9‑4
cleared. You should take any the reset stem to acknowledge the and Antilock Brake System (ABS)
messages that appear on the message and clear it from the Warning Light on page 5‑16 for
display seriously and remember that display. more information. Press and release
clearing the messages only makes the reset stem to acknowledge the
the messages disappear, not correct message and clear it from the
the problem. display.
FLUID Door Ajar Messages ENG (Engine) HOT

This message displays if the brake DOORS This message displays when the
fluid is low. Check the brake fluid as engine coolant temperature is hot.
soon as possible and have your This message displays when one or Check the engine coolant
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See more of the doors is ajar. Check all temperature gauge. See Engine
Braking on page 9‑4 for more the doors on your vehicle to make Coolant Temperature Gauge on
information. Press and release the sure they are closed. The message page 5‑9. Have your vehicle
reset stem to acknowledge the clears from the display after all of serviced by your dealer as soon
message and clear it from the the doors are closed. as possible if you suspect the
display. engine is overheating. See Engine
Engine Cooling System Overheating on page 10‑23 for more
PARK BRK (Brake) information.
Messages
This message displays when the
parking brake is set. See Parking AC (Air Conditioning) OFF Engine Oil Messages
Brake on page 9‑45 and Antilock This message displays when the
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light CHANGE OIL
engine coolant temperature is too
on page 5‑16 for more information. high and the air conditioning in your This message displays when the oil
The message clears from the vehicle needs to be turned off. See needs to be changed. Check the oil
display after the parking brake is Engine Overheating on page 10‑23 in your vehicle as soon as possible
released or by pressing and and Climate Control Systems on and have your vehicle serviced by
releasing the reset stem. page 8‑1 for more information. This your dealer. See Engine Oil on
message displays along with the page 10‑10 and Maintenance
ENG HOT message. Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
information. Press and release the
reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the
display.
OIL the reset stem to acknowledge the LOW FUEL

message and clear it from the
This message displays when the oil This message displays if the level of
display.
pressure is low. See Engine Oil fuel in the vehicle is low. Also check
Pressure Light on page 5‑18 and the fuel gauge. See Fuel Gauge on
Engine Oil on page 10‑10 for more Fuel System Messages page 5‑8 for more information. Refill
information. FUEL CAP the fuel tank as soon as possible.
Engine Power Messages This message displays if the Lamp Messages

vehicle's fuel cap is either off or
REDUCED POWER loose. Pull over as soon as possible TURN SIGNAL
and check to see if the fuel cap is
This message displays when the This message displays when the
secure. You may also see the check
vehicle's engine power is reduced. turn signal is on for about 1.2 km
engine light on the instrument panel
Reduced engine power can affect (0.75 miles) of travel. Press and
cluster. If the check engine light
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. release the reset stem to
does come on when the fuel cap
If this message is on, but there acknowledge the message and
was loose, it may take a few driving
is no reduction in performance, clear it from the display.
trips before the light turns off. See
proceed to your destination. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
performance may be reduced the
page 5‑13 for more information if the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
light still remains on. Press and
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
release the reset stem to
speed while this message is on, but
acknowledge the message and
acceleration and speed may be
clear it from the display.
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible. Press and release
Ride Control System TRAC (Traction) OFF TRACTION FAULT

Messages This message displays when the This message will display if there is
Traction Control System (TCS) is a problem with the TCS. Have your
SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS turned off by pressing the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
(System) StabiliTrak button. See StabiliTrak® StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48
This message displays if there is a System on page 9‑48 for more for more information. Press and
problem with the StabiliTrak system. information. release the reset stem to
Have your vehicle serviced by your acknowledge the message and
TRAC (Traction) ON clear it from the display.
dealer. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑48 for more information. This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is Service Vehicle Messages
STAB (Stability) SYS turned on when it was previously off
(System) OFF during the same ignition cycle. SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)
This message displays when the TRAC (Traction) LOW This message displays if your
StabiliTrak system is turned off. See vehicle needs service. Have your
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48 This message displays when the vehicle serviced by your dealer as
for more information. Traction Control System (TCS) is soon as possible.
active.
Tire Messages SERV (Service) TPM (Tire Transmission Messages

Pressure Monitor)
LOW TIRE SERV (Service) 4WD
This message displays if a part on (Four-Wheel Drive)
This message displays if a low tire the Tire Pressure Monitor System
pressure is detected in any of the (TPMS) is not working properly. The This message displays when there
vehicle's tires. Press and release tire pressure light also flashes and is a problem with the transfer case
the reset stem to acknowledge the then remains on during the same control system. Check the transfer
message and clear it from the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure case on your vehicle and have it
display. The message appears at Light on page 5‑18. Several serviced by your dealer. See
each ignition cycle until the tires are conditions may cause this message Four-Wheel Drive on page 9‑40 for
inflated to the correct inflation to appear. See Tire Pressure more information about the transfer
pressure. See Tires on page 10‑47 Monitor Operation on page 10‑57 for case. Press and release the reset
and Tire Pressure on page 10‑54 for more information. If the warning stem to acknowledge the message
more information on tires and the comes on and stays on, there may and clear it from the display.
correct inflation pressures. be a problem with the TPMS. See
your dealer.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO: Turns the headlamps on

automatically at normal brightness,
together with the following:
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting . Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 . Taillamps
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Parking Lamps
Headlamp High/Low-Beam . Instrument Panel Lights
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 See Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running on page 6‑3 for more information.
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Automatic Headlamp parking lamps, together with the
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 following:
The exterior lamp control is located
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
on the instrument panel on the left . Sidemarker Lamps
Turn and Lane-Change
side of the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 . Taillamps
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the . License Plate Lamps
Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . 6-5 knob, located to the right of this
. Instrument Panel Lights
symbol, to choose one of the four
Interior Lighting exterior lamp positions.
Instrument Panel Illumination 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 O (Off): Turns off all exterior lamps headlamps, together with the
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 including the Daytime Running previously listed lamps and lights.
Lamps (DRL).
Lighting Features
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
Exterior Lamps Off Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass

Reminder Low-Beam Changer This feature lets you use the
If a door is open, a reminder chime 2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam high-beam headlamps to signal a
sounds when the headlamps or Changer: Push the turn signal/ driver in front of you that you want
parking lamps are manually turned multifunction lever away from you to to pass. It works even if the
on and the key is out of the ignition. turn the high beams on. headlamps are in the automatic
To turn off the chime, turn the position.
Pull the lever towards you to return
headlamp switch to off and then to low beams. To use it, pull the turn signal lever
back on. In the automatic mode, the toward you, then release it.
headlamps turn off once the ignition
If the headlamps are in the
is in LOCK/OFF.
automatic position or on low beam,
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the high-beam headlamps will turn
if the parking lamps are turned on on. They will stay on as long as the
manually, the Daytime Running lever is held toward you. The
Lamps (DRL) will stay on. high-beam indicator on the
This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel cluster will come
instrument panel cluster when the on. Release the lever to return to
high beam headlamps are on. normal operation.
Lighting 6-3
Daytime Running When it begins to get dark, the The vehicle has a light sensor
headlamps will automatically switch located on the top of the instrument
Lamps (DRL) from DRL to the regular headlamps. panel. Do not cover the sensor,
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The regular headlamp system or the system will be on whenever
make it easier for others to see the should be turned on when needed. the ignition is on.
front of your vehicle during the day. The system can turn on the
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
Automatic Headlamp headlamps when driving in a
parking garage, through a tunnel or
first sold in Canada. System when there is overcast weather.
The DRL system will come on when When it is dark enough outside, the This is normal.
the following conditions are met: automatic headlamp system will turn
There is a delay in the transition
on after the transmission has been
. The ignition is on. between the daytime and nighttime
shifted from P (Park) to D (Drive).
operation of the Daytime Running
. The exterior lamps control is The headlamps, taillamps,
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
in AUTO. sidemarker, parking lamps, roof
headlamp system so that driving
. The transmission is not in marker lamps, and the instrument
under bridges or bright overhead
P (Park) if you have an panel lights turn on at normal
street lights does not affect the
automatic transmission. brightness. The radio lights will
system. The DRL and automatic
become dimmer when the
. The light sensor determines it is headlamp system will only be
headlights are off compared to when
daytime. affected when the light sensor
the headlights are on.
detects a change in lighting lasting
When the DRL are on, only the longer than the delay.
parking lamps or reduced intensity
low beam headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkers, and
other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel will not be lit up
either.
6-4 Lighting
If the vehicle is started in a dark Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change
garage, the automatic headlamp
system will come on immediately.
Signals
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it will take about 1 minute for the
automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See Instrument
Panel Illumination Control on
page 6‑6.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):

Press this button located on the Move the lever all the way up or
instrument panel, to make the front down to signal a turn.
and rear turn signal lamps flash on Raise or lower the lever until the
and off. This warns others that you arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
are having trouble. change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
Press | again to turn the
flashers off. The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
The turn signals do not work while
the hazard warning flashers are on.
Lighting 6-5
If after signaling a turn or a lane Fog Lamps Some localities have laws that
change the arrows flash rapidly or require the headlamps to be on
do not come on, a signal bulb may along with the fog lamps.
be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a Exterior Cargo Lamps
bulb is not burned out, check the The cargo lamps (if equipped) can
fuse. For bulb replacement, see be used if more light is needed in
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, the cargo area of the vehicle or in
and Back-Up Lamps on page 10‑37. the top-box storage units.
For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑40. The fog lamp button is located near
the exterior lamps control.
Turn Signal On Chime
If a turn signal is left on for more
# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with
fog lamps, press to turn the fog
than 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chime
lamps on or off. An indicator light
will sound at each flash of the turn
will turn on in the button when the
signal and the message TURN
fog lamps are on.
SIGNAL will also appear in the DIC.
To turn the chime and message off, The parking lamps or low-beam
move the turn signal lever to the off headlamps must be on for the fog
position. lamps to work. The fog lamps will go
off whenever the high-beam
See “TURN SIGNAL” under Lamp This button is located on the driver
headlamps come on. When the high
Messages on page 5‑25 for more side of the instrument panel near
beams go off, the fog lamps come
information. the exterior lamp control.
on again.
6-6 Lighting
Press to turn the cargo lamps on Interior Lighting To manually turn on the dome
and off. lamps, turn the thumbwheel, located
next to the exterior lamps control, all
The dome lamps must be on for the Instrument Panel the way up. The cargo lamps may
cargo lamps to come on. See Dome
Lamps on page 6‑6.
Illumination Control come on, if the vehicle is equipped
with Bluetooth. In this position, the
If the vehicle is equipped with D (Instrument Panel Lights): lamps remain on whether a door is
Bluetooth®, turning the instrument Turn the thumbwheel up or down to
opened or closed.
panel illumination control brighten or dim the instrument panel
thumbwheel all the way up will turn lights and the radio display. The Reading Lamps
on the cargo lamps. instrument panel lights, cluster, and
Press the lens on the lamps to turn
radio display do not dim to complete
each reading lamp on or off.
darkness. Turning the thumbwheel
all the way up will turn on the dome These lamps will not come on with
lamps and may also turn on the the dome lamps.
cargo lamp, if the vehicle is
Dome Lamp Override
equipped with Bluetooth.
The dome lamp override button is
The instrument panel light
located below the exterior lamps
brightness control will only work if
control.
the headlamps or parking lamps are
on. See Exterior Lamp Controls on E (Dome Lamp Override): Press
page 6‑1. this button in to make the dome
lamps remain off when the doors
Dome Lamps are open. To return the lamps to
automatic operation, press E again
The dome lamps come on when any
door is opened. and return it to the out position.
Lighting 6-7
Lighting Features voltage move up or down. This is needed. It can temporarily reduce
normal. If there is a problem, an the power demands of some
alert will be displayed. accessories.
Exit Lighting
The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in
The interior lamps will come on idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being
when the key is removed from the high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
ignition. The lamps will not come on This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
if the dome override button is (alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the
pressed in. enough at idle to produce all of the driver. If so, a DIC message might
power needed for very high be displayed, such as BATTERY
Battery Load electrical loads. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
Management A high electrical load occurs when VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
several of the following are on, such If one of these messages displays, it
The vehicle has Electric Power is recommended that the driver
Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, reduce the electrical loads as much
the battery's temperature and state as possible. See Driver Information
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, Center (DIC) on page 5‑20.
for best performance and extended
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets. Battery Power Protection
When the battery's state of charge
EPM works to prevent excessive This feature shuts off the dome
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
discharge of the battery. It does this lamp if it is left on for more than
to quickly bring the charge back up.
by balancing the generator's output 20 minutes when the ignition is in
When the state of charge is high,
and the vehicle's electrical needs. LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
the voltage is lowered slightly to
It can increase engine idle speed to the battery from running down.
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage generate more power whenever
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction { WARNING

System Infotainment Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to crash resulting in injury or death
Introduction
become familiar with its features. to you or others. Do not give
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
extended attention to infotainment
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 tasks while driving.
Radio This system provides access to

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 many audio and non audio listings.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: The chime signals related Theft-Deterrent Feature
road while driving, do the following to safety belts, parking brake, and
while the vehicle is parked: other functions of the vehicle TheftLock® is designed to
operate through the radio/ discourage theft of the radio. The
. Become familiar with the feature works automatically by
operation and controls of the entertainment system. If that
equipment is replaced or learning a portion of the Vehicle
audio system. Identification Number (VIN). If the
additional equipment is added to
. Set up the tone, speaker the vehicle, the chimes may not radio is moved to a different vehicle,
adjustments, and preset radio work. Make sure that replacement it does not operate and either LOC
stations. or additional equipment is or LOCKED displays.
For more information, see Defensive compatible with the vehicle When the radio and vehicle are
Driving on page 9‑3. before installing it. See turned off, there may be a blinking
Accessories and Modifications on red light to indicate TheftLock is
Notice: Contact your dealer page 10‑4. armed.
before adding any equipment.
The vehicle has Retained With TheftLock activated, the radio
Adding audio or communication Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, does not operate if stolen.
equipment could interfere with the audio system can be played
the operation of the engine, radio, even after the ignition is turned off.
or other systems, and could See Retained Accessory Power
damage them. Follow federal (RAP) on page 9‑31 for more
rules covering mobile radio and information.
telephone equipment.
Operation
AM-FM Radio
q VOL r (Volume): Turn to

increase or to decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): When the ignition
is turned off, press to display
the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to
change what displays while using
RDS. The display options are
station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY (program type),
and the name of the program
(if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the
DISPL knob while in XM mode to
retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Playing the Radio RCL (Recall): Press to switch the Channel Name.
display between the radio station To change the default on the
AM-FM Radio frequency, band, and the time. display, press the DISPL knob until
PWR (Power): Press to turn the When the ignition is off, press to you see the desired display, then
system on and off. display the time. press and hold this knob for
VOL (Volume): Turn to increase or Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) two seconds and the radio
to decrease the volume. beeps once.
PWR (Power): Press to turn the
system on and off.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): 2. Press and hold the w or Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Automatic volume automatically x button to increase or to To adjust the bass or treble:
adjusts the audio system to make decrease the tone.
up for road and wind noise while 1. Press and release the AUDIO
driving. The volume level should To adjust the bass or treble to the knob until BASS (bass) or TREB
always sound the same while center position: (treble) displays.
driving. 1. Press and release the AUDIO 2. Turn the AUDIO knob to
Set the volume at the desired level. button until BAS (bass) or TRE increase or to decrease
Press to select LOW, MEDIUM, and (treble) displays. the tone.
HIGH. AVOL displays. Each higher 2. Press and hold the AUDIO To adjust the bass/treble to the
setting allows for higher volume button for more than middle position, press and hold the
compensation at faster vehicle two seconds until a beep AUDIO knob. The radio produces
speeds. sounds. one beep and adjusts the display
NONE displays if the radio cannot To adjust both tone controls and level to the middle position.
determine the vehicle speed. To turn both speaker controls to the middle To adjust all tone and speaker
automatic volume off, press until position: controls to the middle position, push
OFF displays. and hold the AUDIO knob when no
1. Exit out of audio mode by
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) pressing another button, causing tone or speaker control displays.
the radio to perform that function ALL CENTERED displays and a
AM-FM Radio or wait five seconds for the beep sounds.
To adjust the bass or treble: display to return to time of day.
1. Press and release the AUDIO 2. Press and hold AUDIO for more
button until BAS (bass) or TRE than two seconds until a beep
(treble) displays. sounds. CEN (center) displays.
AUTO EQ (Automatic To adjust the balance or fade to the Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Equalization): Press to select center position: To adjust the balance or fade:
customized equalization settings 1. Press and release the
designed for country/western, jazz, 1. Press and release the
AUDIO button until BAL AUDIO knob until BAL (balance)
talk, pop, rock, and classical. (balance) or FAD (fade) displays. or FADE (fade) displays.
To return to the manual mode, press 2. Press and hold the
the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM 2. Turn the AUDIO knob to
AUDIO button for more than increase or to decrease the
displays. Then manually adjust the two seconds until a beep
bass/treble, using the AUDIO knob. level.
sounds.
Adjusting the Speakers To adjust the balance or fade to the
To adjust both speaker controls and middle position:
(Balance/Fade) both tone controls to the middle
position: 1. Press and release the
Fade may not be available if the
AUDIO knob until BAL (balance)
vehicle is a regular cab model. 1. Exit out of audio mode by or FADE (fade) displays.
pressing another button, causing
AM-FM Radio 2. Press and hold the AUDIO knob
the radio to perform that function
To adjust balance or fade: or wait five seconds for the until one beep sounds.
1. Press and release the AUDIO display to return to time of day. To adjust all tone and speaker
button until BAL (balance) or 2. Press and hold AUDIO for more controls to the middle position, push
FAD (fade) displays. than two seconds until a beep and hold the AUDIO knob when no
sounds. CEN (center) displays. tone or speaker control displays.
2. Press and hold the w or ALL CENTERED displays and a
x button to increase or to beep sounds.
decrease the level.
Radio Messages Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) Radio

AM-FM Radio CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The
CAL (Calibration Error): The
audio system has been calibrated AM-FM Radio
for the vehicle from the factory.
audio system has been calibrated If CAL ERR displays it means that Finding a Station
for the vehicle from the factory. the radio has not been configured
If CAL displays it means that the AM-FM Radio
properly for the vehicle and it must
radio has not been configured be returned to your dealer for AM FM: Press to switch between
properly for the vehicle and it must service. FM1, FM2, or AM.
be returned to your dealer for
service. LOCKED: This message displays TUNE: Turn to select radio
when the TheftLock® system has stations.
LOC (Locked): This message locked up. Take the vehicle to your
displays when the THEFTLOCK® o SEEK: Press to go to the
dealer for service. previous station and stay there.
system has locked up. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service. If any error occurs repeatedly or if To scan stations, press and hold
an error cannot be corrected, o SEEK for two seconds until a
If any error occurs repeatedly or if contact your dealer.
an error cannot be corrected, beep sounds. The radio goes to a
contact your dealer. station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press
o SEEK again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) Radio Data System (RDS)
hold o SEEK for more than BAND: Press to switch between The Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) has
four seconds until two beeps sound. FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 an RDS system. RDS features are
The radio goes to the first preset (if equipped). The selection available for use only on FM
station, plays for a few seconds, displays. stations that broadcast RDS
then goes to the next preset station. information.
q TUNE r: Turn to select radio
Press o SEEK again to stop stations. With RDS, the radio can do the
scanning presets. following:
q SEEK r : Press to go to the
SEEK p : Press to go to the next previous or next station and stay . Seek to stations broadcasting
station and stay there. there. the selected type of
To scan stations, press and hold q SCAN r : Press and hold for programming.
SEEK p for two seconds until a more than two seconds, SCAN . Receive announcements
beep sounds. The radio goes to a displays and the radio beeps once. concerning local and national
station, plays for a few seconds, The radio goes to a station, plays emergencies.
then goes to the next station. Press for a few seconds, then goes to the . Display messages from radio
SEEK p again to stop scanning. next station. Press q or r again, to stations.
stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and . Seek to stations with traffic
To scan preset stations, press and announcements.
hold SEEK p for more than
four seconds until two beeps sound. hold q or r for more than
The radio goes to the first preset four seconds, PSCN displays and
station stored on the pushbuttons, the radio beeps once. The radio
plays for a few seconds, then goes goes to a preset station, plays for a
to the next preset station. Press few seconds, then goes to the next
SEEK p again to stop scanning preset station. Press q or r again,
presets. to stop scanning presets.
This system relies upon receiving announcement. Alert The last message can be displayed
specific information from these announcements cannot be by pressing the INFO button. The
stations and only works when the turned off. last message stays on the display
information is available. In rare ALERT! is not affected by tests of until a new message is received or
cases, a radio station could the emergency broadcast system. the radio is tuned to a different
broadcast incorrect information that This feature is not supported by all station.
causes the radio features to work RDS stations. When a message is not available
improperly. If this happens, contact from a station, NO INFO displays.
the radio station. INFO (Information): If the current
station has a message, the TRAF (Traffic): TRAF displays
While the radio is tuned to an RDS information symbol or INFO when the station tuned to
station, the station name or call displays. Press this button to see broadcasts traffic announcements.
letters display instead of the the message. The message can When a traffic announcement is
frequency. RDS stations can also display the artist, song title, call in broadcast on this station you will
provide the time of day, a program phone numbers, etc. hear it.
type (PTY) for current programming,
and the name of the program being If the entire message is not If the station does not broadcast
broadcast. displayed, parts of the message traffic announcements, press the
display every three seconds. To TRAF button and the radio
RDS Messages scroll through the message, press seeks to a station that does. When
ALERT!: The Alert feature warns of and release the INFO button. A new a station that broadcasts traffic
local or national emergencies. When group of words displays after every announcements is found, the radio
an alert announcement comes on press of this button. Once the stops seeking and TRAF displays.
the current radio station, ALERT! complete message has displayed, If no station is found that broadcasts
displays. The announcement is the information symbol or INFO traffic announcements, NO TRAF
heard, even if the volume is low or a disappears from the display until displays.
CD is playing. If a CD is playing, another new message is received.
play stops during the
If TRAF displays, press the TRAF To cancel the seek, press the To turn alternate frequency off,
button to turn off the traffic SEEK / TYPE button. This also exits press and hold BAND again for
announcements. the program type seek mode and 2 seconds. AF OFF displays. The
The radio plays the traffic returns to the last tuned station. radio does not switch to other
announcement if the volume is low. If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are stations.
The radio interrupts the play of a CD on, the radio searches for stations DISPL (Display): Press to change
if the last tuned station broadcasts with the selected PTY and traffic what information displays while
traffic announcements. announcements. using RDS. The display options
If the radio cannot find the desired are station name, RDS station
Finding a Program Type (PTY) frequency, PTY (program type), and
Station program type, NONE displays and
the radio returns to the last tuned the name of the program
To select and find a PTY station: (if available).
station.
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPE SCAN: To scan PTYs, press and Setting Preset PTYs Only
and a PTY displays. hold the SEEK / SCAN until a beep The six pushbuttons have factory
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to sounds. The radio goes to a station, PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
select a PTY. plays for a few seconds, then goes (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
3. Once the desired PTY displays, to the next station. programmed on the numbered
press the SEEK / TYPE button BAND (Alternate Frequency): pushbuttons. To program PTYs:
to select PTY's first station. Alternate frequency lets the radio 1. Press BAND to select FM1
4. To go to another station switch to a stronger station with the or FM2.
within that PTY, press the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and 2. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to
SEEK / TYPE button twice to activate program type select
display the PTY and then go to hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON
displays. The radio could switch to mode. TYPE and the last
another station. selected PTY displays.
stations with a stronger frequency.
3. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to select To program either radio: For more information, contact XM at
a PTY. 1. Tune in the desired station. www.xmradio.com or call
4. Press and hold one of the six 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
2. Press and hold one of the six www.xmradio.ca or call
numbered pushbuttons until a numbered pushbuttons until the
beep sounds. When that 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
radio beeps once. When that
numbered pushbutton is numbered pushbutton is pressed Finding a Program Type (PTY)
pressed, the PTY that was set, again, the station that was Channel
returns. stored, returns. To select and find a PTY:
5. Repeat the steps for each 3. Repeat the steps for each
pushbutton. 1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPE
pushbutton. and a PTY displays.
Setting Preset Stations
Satellite Radio 2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to
If the radio does not have XM, up to select a PTY.
18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service 3. Once the desired PTY displays,
six AM) can be programmed on the
XM is a satellite radio service that is press the SEEK / TYPE button
six numbered pushbuttons.
based in the 48 contiguous United to select PTY's first station.
If the radio has XM, up to States and 10 Canadian provinces. 4. To go to another station within
30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, XM Satellite Radio has a wide that PTY, pess the SEEK / TYPE
six AM, six XM1, and six XM2) can variety of programming and button twice to display the PTY
be programmed on the six commercial-free music, and then go to another station.
numbered pushbuttons. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to To cancel the seek, press the
receive the XM service. If XM SEEK / TYPE button. This also exits
Service needs to be reactivated, the the program type seek mode and
radio will display "No Subscription returns to the last tuned station.
Please Renew" on channel XM1.
If the radio cannot find the desired q SCAN r : Press and hold for To program either radio:
program type, NONE displays and more than two seconds, SCAN 1. Tune in the desired channel.
the radio returns to the last tuned displays and the radio beeps once.
station. The radio goes to a channel, plays 2. Press and hold one of the six
for a few seconds, then goes to the numbered pushbuttons until the
Finding an XM Channel radio beeps once. When that
next channel. Press q or r again, numbered pushbutton is pressed
BAND: Press to switch between to stop scanning presets.
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 again, the channel that was
(if equipped). The selection To scan preset channels, press stored, returns.
displays. and hold q or r for more than 3. Repeat the steps for each
DISPL (Display): Press to retrieve four seconds, PSCN displays and pushbutton.
four different categories of the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a preset channel, plays for a XM Radio Messages
information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, few seconds, then goes to the next XL (Explicit Language
Category or PTY, Channel Number/ preset channel. Press q or r again, Channels): These channels, or any
Channel Name. to stop scanning presets. others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
q TUNE r : Turn to select XM Setting Preset Channels 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
Channels. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
If the radio has XM, up to
q SEEK r : Press to go to the 30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, 6 AM, Updating: The encryption code in
previous or next channel and stay 6 XM1, and 6 XM2) can be the receiver is being updated, and
there. programmed on the six numbered no action is required. This process
pushbuttons. should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signl: The system is No Info: No artist, song title, Radio ID: If this message is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle category, or text information is received when tuned to channel 0,
is in a location that is blocking the available at this time on this there could be a receiver fault.
XM signal. When the vehicle is channel. The system is working Consult with your dealer.
moved into an open area, the signal properly. Unknown: If this message is
should return. No Subscription Please Renew: received when tuned to channel 0,
Loading: The radio system is XM subscription needs to be there could be a receiver fault.
acquiring and processing audio and reactivated. Contact XM at Consult with your dealer.
text data. No action is needed. This www.xmradio.com or call Check XM: If this message does
message should disappear shortly. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and not clear within a short period of
Off Air: This channel is not www.xmradio.ca or call time, the receiver could have a fault.
currently in service. Tune to another 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Consult with your dealer.
channel. NotFound: No artist, song title,
CH Unavl: This previously category, or text information is Radio Reception
assigned channel is no longer available at this time on this
channel. The system is working Frequency interference and static
assigned. Tune to another station. can occur during normal radio
If this station was one of the properly.
reception if items such as cell phone
presets, choose another station for XM Lock: The XM receiver in your chargers, vehicle convenience
that preset button. vehicle could have previously been accessories, and external electronic
Unauth: This channel is blocked or in another vehicle. For security devices are plugged into the
cannot be received with your XM purposes, XM receivers cannot be accessory power outlet. If there is
Subscription package. swapped between vehicles. If this interference or static, unplug the
message is received after having item from the accessory power
your vehicle serviced, check with outlet.
your dealer.
AM XM™ Satellite Radio Service Fixed Mast Antenna

The range for most AM stations is XM Satellite Radio Service gives The fixed mast antenna can
greater than for FM, especially at digital radio reception from withstand most car washes without
night. The longer range can cause coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous being damaged as long as it is
station frequencies to interfere with United States, and in Canada. Just securely attached to the base. If the
each other. For better radio as with FM, tall buildings or hills can mast becomes slightly bent,
reception, most AM radio stations interfere with satellite radio signals, straighten it out by hand. If the mast
boost the power levels during the causing the sound to fade in and is badly bent, replace it.
day, and then reduce these levels out. In addition, traveling or standing
during the night. Static can also under heavy foliage, bridges, Occasionally check to make sure
occur when things like storms and garages, or tunnels may cause loss the antenna is tightened to its base.
power lines interfere with radio of the XM signal for a period of time. If tightening is required, tighten by
reception. When this happens, try hand until fully seated plus
reducing the treble on the radio. Cellular Phone Usage one quarter turn.
Cellular phone usage may cause
FM Stereo interference with the vehicle's radio. Satellite Radio Antenna
FM signals only reach about This interference may occur when The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). making or receiving phone calls, located on the roof of the vehicle.
Although the radio has a built-in charging the phone's battery, Keep the antenna clear of
electronic circuit that automatically or simply having the phone on. This obstructions for clear radio
works to reduce interference, some interference causes an increased reception.
static can occur, especially around level of static while listening to the
tall buildings or hills, causing the radio. If static is received while
sound to fade in and out. listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Audio Players the CD player and the loading slot If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
free of foreign materials, liquids, a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
and debris. clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
CD Player detergent solution mixed with water,
If an error displays, see “CD
Care of The CD Player Messages” later in this section. and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
Do not add any label to a CD, it Care of CDs the edge.
could get caught in the CD player.
If a CD is recorded on a personal If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Playing a CD
computer and a description label is can be reduced due to CD-R quality,
the method of recording, the quality Insert a CD partway into the slot,
needed, try labeling the top of the label side up. The player pulls it in,
recorded CD with a marking pen. of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R and READING displays. The CD
The use of CD lens cleaners for has been handled. Handle them should begin playing. To insert a CD
CDs is not advised, due to the risk carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their with the ignition off, first press the
of contaminating the lens of the CD original cases or other protective Z (eject) button or the
optics with lubricants internal to the cases and away from direct sunlight DISPL knob.
CD player mechanism. and dust. The CD player scans the If the ignition or radio is turned off
Notice: If a label is added to a bottom surface of the disc. If the with a CD in the player it stays in
CD, more than one CD is inserted surface of a CD is damaged, such the player. When the ignition or
into the slot at a time, or an as cracked, broken, or scratched, radio is turned on, the CD starts to
attempt is made to play scratched the CD does not play properly or not play where it stopped, if it was the
or damaged CDs, the CD player at all. Do not touch the bottom side last selected audio source.
could be damaged. While using of a CD while handling it; this could When the CD is inserted, the CD
the CD player, use only CDs in damage the surface. Pick up CDs symbol displays. As each new track
good condition without any label, by grasping the outer edges or the starts to play, the track number
load one CD at a time, and keep edge of the hole and the outer edge. displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 6 RDM (Random): Press to hear DISPL (Display): Press to see how
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an the tracks in random, rather than long the current track has been
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the sequential, order. RDM ON displays. playing. ET and the elapsed time of
smaller CDs are loaded in the same RDM and the track number displays the track displays. To change the
manner. when each track starts to play. default on the display (track or
3 REV (Fast Reverse): Press and Press again to turn off random play. elapsed time), press until you see
hold to reverse quickly within a RDM OFF displays. the desired display, then press and
track. Press and hold for less than q SEEK r : Press the left arrow to hold for two seconds. The radio
two seconds to reverse at 10 times go to the start of the current or the beeps once. The selected display is
the normal playing speed. Press previous track. Press the right arrow now the default.
and hold for more than two seconds to go to the start of the next track. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
to reverse at 20 times the normal Pressing either arrow for more than when a CD is playing. The inactive
playing speed. Release to play the two seconds scans the next tracks, CD remains inside the radio for
track. playing the first eight seconds of future listening.
4 FWD (Fast Forward): Press and each track until all of the tracks CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
hold to advance quickly within a have been previewed. Press either a CD when listening to the radio.
track. Press and hold for less than arrow again to stop scanning and to The CD symbol displays when a CD
two seconds to advance at six times play the track. is loaded.
the normal playing speed. Press q TUNE r : Turn to go to the Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD.
and hold for more than two seconds previous or next track. Eject can be activated with either
to advance at 17 times the normal the ignition or radio off. CDs can be
playing speed. Release to play the loaded with the ignition and radio off
track. if this button is pressed first.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

. Make sure to finalize the disc and navigate up to the maximum,
when burning an MP3/WMA but all items over the maximum are
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc Format disc, using multiple sessions. played.
If you burn your own MP3/WMA It is usually better to burn the
disc all at once. Root Directory
disc on a personal computer:
The player is able to read and play The root directory is treated as a
. Make sure the MP3/WMA files
a maximum of 253 folders, folder. If the root directory has
are recorded on a CD-R disc.
50 playlists, 20 sessions, and compressed audio files, the
. Make sure playlists have a .m3u 949 files. Long file names, folder directory displays as F1 ROOT. All
or .wpl extension, other file names, or playlist names may use files contained directly under the
extensions might not work. more disc memory space than root directory are accessed prior to
. Files can be recorded with a necessary. To conserve space on any root directory folders. However,
variety of fixed or variable bit the disc, minimize the length of the playlists (Px) are always accessed
rates. Song title, artist name, file, folder, or playlist names. An before root folders or files.
and album are displayed by the MP3/WMA CD-R that was recorded Empty Directory or Folder
radio when recorded using ID3 using no file folders can also be
tags version 1 and 2. used. The system can support up to If a root directory or a folder exists
11 folders in depth, though, keep the somewhere in the file structure that
. Create a folder structure that depth of the folders to a minimum in contains only folders/subfolders and
makes it easy to find songs order to keep down the complexity no compressed files directly
while driving. Organize songs by and confusion in trying to locate a beneath them, the player advances
albums using one folder for each particular folder during playback. If a to the next folder in the file structure
album. Each folder or album CD contains more than the that contains compressed audio
should contain 18 songs or less. maximum of 253 folders, files. The empty folder does not
50 playlists, 20 sessions, and display.
949 files, the player lets you access
No Folder Order of Play When play enters a new folder, the

When the CD contains only Tracks are played in the following display does not automatically show
compressed files, the files are order: the new folder name unless you
located under the root folder. The have chosen the folder mode as the
. Play begins from the first track in default display. See DISPL (display)
next and previous folder functions the first playlist and continues
have no function on a CD that was later in this section for more
sequentially through all tracks in information. The new track name
recorded without folders or playlists. each playlist. When the last
When displaying the name of the displays.
track of the last playlist has
folder the radio displays ROOT. played, play continues from the File System and Naming
When the CD contains only playlists first track of the first playlist. The song name that displays is the
and compressed audio files, but no . If the CD does not contain any song name that is contained in the
folders, all files are located under playlists, then play begins from ID3 tag. If the song name is not
the root folder. The folder down and the first track under the root present in the ID3 tag, then the
the folder up buttons search directory. When all tracks from radio displays the file name without
playlists (Px) first and then go to the the root directory have played, the extension (such as .mp3) as the
root folder. When the radio displays play continues from files track name.
the name of the folder, the radio according to their numerical
displays ROOT. Track names longer than
listing. After playing the last 32 characters or four pages are
track from the last folder, play shortened. Parts of words on the
begins again at the first track of last page of text and the extension
the first folder or root directory. of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists 1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold
Preprogrammed playlists which this button to go to the first track in this button to advance quickly within
were created by WinAmp™, the previous folder. Pressing this a track. Press and hold this button
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ button while in folder random mode for less than two seconds to
software can be accessed, however, takes you to the previous folder and advance at 10 times the normal
they cannot be edited. These plays the tracks in random order in playing speed. Press and hold it for
playlists are treated as special that folder. more than two seconds to advance
folders containing compressed at 20 times the normal playing
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this speed. Release this button to play
audio song files.
button to go to the first track in the the track.
Playing an MP3/WMA next folder. Pressing this button 6 RDM (Random): To play the
Insert a CD partway into the slot, while in folder random mode takes tracks in random order in the current
label side up. The player pulls it in, the CD to the next folder and plays folder or playlist, press and release
and READING displays. The CD the tracks in random order in that this button. FLDR RDM (folder
should begin playing and the CD folder. random) displays. Once all of the
symbol displays. If you want to 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold tracks in the current folder or playlist
insert a CD with the ignition off, first this button to reverse quickly within have played, the system moves to
press the Z button or the a track. Press and hold this button the next folder or playlist and plays
DISPL knob. for less than two seconds to reverse all of the tracks in random order.
at 10 times the normal playing To play all the tracks in random
If the ignition or radio is turned off speed. Press and hold it for more
with a CD in the player it stays in order on the CD, press and hold this
than two seconds to reverse at button for two seconds. A beep
the player. When the ignition or 20 times the normal playing speed.
radio is turned on, the CD starts to sounds and DISC RDM (disc
Release this button to play the random) displays. This feature does
play where it stopped, if it was the track.
last selected audio source. not work with playlists.
As each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
When in random, pressing and DISPL (Display): Press this knob To change the default on the
releasing either SEEK arrow takes to switch between track mode, display, press the DISPL knob until
the CD to the previous or to the next folder/playlist mode, and time of day you see the desired display, then
random track. mode. The display shows only press and hold this knob for
Press and release this button again eight characters, but there can be two seconds. The radio produces
to turn off random play. NO RDM up to four pages of text. If there are one beep and the selected display
(no random) displays. more than eight characters in the is now the default.
song, folder, or playlist name, INFO (Information): INFO displays
q SEEK r : Press the left pressing this knob within when a current track has ID3 tag
SEEK arrow to go to the start of the two seconds takes you to the next
previous track. Press the right information. Press this button to
page of text. If there are no other display the artist name and album
SEEK arrow to go to the start of the pages to be shown, pressing this
next track. Pressing either SEEK contained in the tag. INFO
knob within two seconds takes you disappears from the display when
arrow for more than two seconds to the next display mode.
searches the previous or next tracks the information in the ID3 tag has
at two tracks per second. Release
. Track mode displays the current finished being read.
the button to stop searching and to track number and the ID3 tag BAND: Press this button to listen to
play the track. song name. the radio when a CD is playing. The
q TUNE r : Turn to reverse or
. Folder/playlist mode displays the inactive CD remains inside the radio
advance through the tracks in all current folder or playlist number for future listening.
folders or playlists. The track and the folder/playlist name. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this
number and file name displays for . Time of day mode displays the button to play a CD when listening
each track. Turning this knob while time of day and the ID3 tag to the radio. The CD symbol
in random reverses or advances the song name. illuminates on the display when a
tracks in sequential order. CD is loaded.

. The air is very humid. If so, wait
Z (Eject): Press this button to
about an hour and try again. Phone
eject a CD. Eject can activate while
either the ignition or radio is off. . The format of the CD might not
CDs can be loaded with the ignition be compatible. See “Using an
Bluetooth
and radio off if this button is pressed MP3” later in this section. For vehicles equipped with
first. Bluetooth capability, the system can
. There could have been a
interact with many cell phones,
CD Messages problem while burning the CD.
allowing:
CHECK CD: If this message
. The label could be caught in the . Placement and receipt of calls in
displays and/or the CD comes out, it CD player.
a hands-free mode.
could be for one of the following If the CD is not playing correctly, for
reasons:
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
any other reason, try a known
address book or contact list with
. It is very hot. When the good CD.
the vehicle.
temperature returns to normal, If any error occurs repeatedly or if
the CD should play. an error cannot be corrected,
. You are driving on a very rough contact your dealer. If the radio
road. When the road becomes displays an error message, write it
smoother, the CD should play. down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
To minimize driver distraction,

. See “Storing and Deleting Phone Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
before driving, and with the vehicle Numbers” in this section for can use a Bluetooth capable cell
parked: more information. phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
. Become familiar with the make and receive phone calls. The
features of the cell phone. { WARNING system can be used while the key is
Organize the phone book and in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
When using a cell phone, it can position. The range of the Bluetooth
contact lists clearly and delete
be distracting to look too long or system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
duplicate or rarely used entries.
too often at the screen of the Not all phones support all functions,
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts. phone or the infotainment and not all phones work with the
(navigation) system. Taking your Bluetooth system. See
. Review the controls and eyes off the road too long or too www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
operation of the infotainment often could cause a crash information on compatible phones.
system. resulting in injury or death. Focus
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. your attention on driving.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing a
Phone” in this section for more
information.
. If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list. See
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
for more information.
Voice Recognition Audio System Pairing

The Bluetooth system uses voice When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
recognition to interpret voice system, sound comes through the must be paired to the Bluetooth
commands to dial phone numbers vehicle's front audio system system and then connected to the
and name tags. speakers and overrides the audio vehicle before it can be used. See
For additional information say “Help” system. Use the audio system your cell phone manufacturer's user
while you are in a voice volume knob, during a call, to guide for Bluetooth functions before
recognition menu. change the volume level. The pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
adjusted volume level remains in phone is not connected, calls will be
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to memory for later calls. To prevent made using OnStar® Hands‐Free
a minimum. The system may not missed calls, a minimum volume Calling, if available. Refer to the
recognize voice commands if there level is used if the volume is turned OnStar owner's guide for more
is too much background noise. down too low. information.
When to Speak: A short tone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a Use the g button, located on the
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
voice command. Wait until the tone driver side of the instrument panel capability cannot be paired to
and then speak. near the headlamp controls, to the vehicle as a phone and an
operate the Bluetooth system. MP3 player at the same time.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
. Up to five cell phones can be
calm and natural voice. g (Push To Talk): Press to answer
paired to the Bluetooth system.
incoming calls, to confirm system
information, and to start speech . The pairing process is disabled
recognition. when the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to be 4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected
completed once, unless the cell phone that you want to pair. Phones
pairing information on the cell For help with this process, see
phone changes or the cell phone The system can list all cell phones
your cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
is deleted from the system. user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the
. Only one paired cell phone can 5. Locate the device named “Your system responds with “is connected”
be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle” in the list on the cell after that phone name.
system at a time. phone. Follow the instructions
. If multiple paired cell phones are on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press and release g.
within range of the system, the PIN that was provided in Step 3. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
system connects to the first After the PIN is successfully
entered, the system prompts you 3. Say “List.”
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired to provide a name for the paired Deleting a Paired Phone
to the system. To link to a cell phone. This name will be
If the phone name you want to
different paired phone, see used to indicate which phones
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
“Linking to a Different Phone” are paired and connected to the
vehicle. The system responds Paired and Connected Phones.”
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
with “<phone name> has been 1. Press and release g.
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
1. Press and release g.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command for which phone to delete.
additional phones.
can be skipped.
4. Say the name of the phone you
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds want to delete.
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification
Number (PIN).
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press and release g.
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to
next available cell phone in the 2. Say “Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags in
order in which all the available cell the Hands Free Directory that is 3. Say the phone number or group
phones were paired. Depending on shared between the Bluetooth and of numbers you want to store all
which cell phone you want to OnStar systems. at once with no pauses, then
connect to, you may have to use follow the directions given by the
this command several times. The following commands are used
system to save a name tag for
delete and store phone numbers.
this number.
1. Press and release g. Store: This command will store a
2. Say “Bluetooth.” phone number, or a group of Using the “Digit Store” Command
numbers as a name tag. If an unwanted number is
3. Say “Change phone.”
Digit Store: This command allows recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is “Clear” at any time to clear the last
a phone number to be stored as a
found, the response will be number.
name tag by entering the digits one
“<Phone name> is now
at a time. To hear all of the numbers
connected.”
Delete: This command is used to recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not
delete individual name tags. “Verify” at any time.
found, the original phone
remains connected. Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press and release g.
command deletes all stored name 2. Say “Digit Store.”
tags in the Hands Free Calling
Directory and the OnStar Turn by
Turn Destinations Directory.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a
that you want to store. After phone number to be dialed by
each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and release g. entering the digits one at a time.
repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Re‐dial: This command is used to
followed by a tone. After the last dial the last number used on the cell
digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers
phone.
“Store,” and then follow the The list command will list all the
directions given by the system to stored numbers and name tags. Using the “Dial” or “Call”
save a name tag for this number. Command
Using the “List” Command
Using the “Delete” Command 1. Press and release g.
1. Press and release g.
1. Press and release g. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
2. Say “Directory.”
2. Say “Delete.” 3. Say the entire number without
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.” pausing or say the name tag.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete. 4. Say “List.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call
speakers.
Command Calls can be made using the
following commands. Using the “Digit Dial” Command
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands Free Dial or Call: The dial or call The digit dial command allows a
Calling Directory and the command can be used phone number to be dialed by
OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations interchangeably to dial a phone entering the digits one at a time.
Directory. number or a stored name tag. After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
If an unwanted number is Using the “Re‐dial” Command . Press and release g again to
recognized by the system, say return to the original call.
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 1. Press and release g.
. To ignore the incoming call,
number. 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” continue with the original call
To hear all of the numbers Once connected, the person called with no action.
recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
“Verify” at any time. speakers. Three‐Way Calling
Three‐Way Calling must be
1. Press and release g. Receiving a Call supported on the Bluetooth phone
2. Say “Digit Dial.” When an incoming call is received, and enabled by the wireless service
3. Say each digit, one at a time, the audio system mutes and a ring carrier to work.
that you want to dial. After each tone is heard in the vehicle. Press 1. While on a call press and
digit is entered, the system and release g to answer the call. release g.
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last Call Waiting 2. Say “Three‐way call.”
digit has been entered, Call waiting must be supported on 3. Use the dial or call command to
say “Dial.” the Bluetooth phone and enabled by dial the number of the third party
Once connected, the person called the wireless service carrier to work. to be called.
will be heard through the audio . Press and release g to answer 4. Once the call is connected,
speakers. an incoming call when another press g to link all the callers
call is active. The original call is together.
placed on hold.
Ending a Call To Transfer Audio From the Voice Pass-Thru

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
To end a call: Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to
During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on
1. Press and release g. vehicle: the cell phone. See the cell phone
2. Say “End Call.” manufacturer's user guide to see if
1. Press and release g. the cell phone supports this feature.
Muting a Call 2. Say “Transfer Call.” This feature can be used to verbally
During a call, all sounds from inside access contacts stored in the cell
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth phone.
the vehicle can be muted so that the System From a Cell Phone
person on the other end of the call 1. Press and release g.
cannot hear them. During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press g for more than 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
To mute a call, press g , and then two seconds. The audio transfers to can be skipped.
say “Mute Call.” the vehicle. If the audio does not 3. Say “Voice.”
To cancel mute, press g , and then transfer to the vehicle, use the audio
transfer feature on the cell phone.
. The cell phone's normal
say “Un‐mute Call.” prompt messages will go
See your cell phone manufacturer's
Transferring a Call user guide for more information. through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
Audio can be transferred between instructions.
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System Other Information

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of The Bluetooth® word mark and
The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the by General Motors is under license.
use this feature when calling a phonebook and phone pairing Other trademarks and trade names
menu driven phone system. Account information. For information on how are those of their respective owners.
numbers can also be stored for use. to delete this information, see the See Radio Frequency Statement on
above sections on Deleting a Paired page 13‑22 for information
Sending a Number or Name Tag Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
During a Call regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
1. Press g. The system responds rules and Industry Canada
“Ready,” followed by a tone. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
A. Temperature Control D. Air Conditioning

B. Fan Control E. Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn the Select from the following modes: / (Floor/Defog): This mode
knob clockwise or counterclockwise H (Vent): Air is directed to the clears the windows of fog or
to increase or decrease the instrument panel outlets. moisture. Air is directed to the floor,
temperature of the air inside the windshield, and side window outlets.
vehicle. \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided When this mode is selected, the
between the instrument panel
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob outlets and floor and side window
system runs the air conditioning
clockwise or counterclockwise to compressor unless the outside
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the temperature is near freezing or
increase or decrease the fan speed. upper outlets and warmer air to the below. Recirculation is not available
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some floor outlets. in this mode.
outside air will still enter the vehicle [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
and will be directed according to the 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the
floor outlets. Recirculation cannot windshield of fog or frost more
position of the mode knob. be selected while in floor mode quickly. Air is directed to the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn because this could cause the windshield and side window outlets.
the knob clockwise or interior window to fog. When this mode is selected, the
counterclockwise to change the system runs the air conditioning
current airflow mode. compressor unless the outside
temperature is near, or below
freezing. Recirculation is not
available in this mode.
Climate Controls 8-3
Do not drive the vehicle until all the @ (Recirculation): Press to turn Air Vents
windows are clear. the recirculation mode on or off. An
Use the thumbwheel on the outlets
# (Air Conditioning): Press to indicator light on the button comes
to change the direction of the
turn the air conditioning system on on to show that the recirculation
mode is on. This mode recirculates air flow.
or off. An indicator light on the
button comes on to show that the air and helps to quickly cool the air Lift up or push down on the
conditioning is on. inside the vehicle. It can be used to thumbwheel located in the center of
prevent outside air and odors from the outlet to direct the air up or
The fan control must be on to use entering the vehicle. down, or slide the thumbwheel to
the air conditioning.
The recirculation mode cannot be the left or right to direct the airflow
There might be a slight change in used with floor/defog, defrost, from side‐to‐side.
engine performance when the air or defogging modes. If recirculation
conditioning compressor shuts off Operation Tips
is selected in these modes, the
and turns on again. This is normal. indicator will flash or not come on.
. Clear away any ice, snow or
The system is designed to make leaves from the air inlets at the
adjustments to help with fuel base of the windshield that may
economy while still maintaining the block the flow of air into the
selected temperature. vehicle.
The air conditioning system . Use of non-GM approved hood
removes moisture from the air, so a deflectors may adversely affect
small amount of water might drip the performance of the system.
under the vehicle while idling or . Keep the path under the front
after turning off the engine. This is
seats clear of objects to help
normal.
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
8-4 Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-26
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-38
Operating Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Drive Systems
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Driving Information Retained Accessory Brakes
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Antilock Brake
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Shifting Into Park (Automatic System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Shifting out of Park (Automatic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parking (Manual Ride Control Systems
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Traction Control
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parking over Things System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-12 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-50
Engine Exhaust
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Cruise Control
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-14 Running the Vehicle While Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-17
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Automatic Transmission
Truck-Camper Loading Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-36
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-53 distractions.
Gasoline Specifications (U.S. Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
California Fuel and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-54 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Filling a Portable Fuel governments have enacted laws driving.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Towing to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
General Towing to the floor.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Driving Characteristics and keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Conversions and Add-Ons Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Add-On Electrical place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
Pickup Conversion to . Watch the road. Do not read,
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
Defensive Driving
{ WARNING { WARNING
Defensive driving means “always
Taking your eyes off the road too expect the unexpected.” The first Drinking and then driving is very
long or too often could cause a step in driving defensively is to wear dangerous. Your reflexes,
crash resulting in injury or death. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on perceptions, attentiveness, and
Focus your attention on driving. page 3‑11. judgment can be affected by even
. Assume that other road users a small amount of alcohol. You
Refer to the infotainment section for (pedestrians, bicyclists, and can have a serious— or even
more information on using that other drivers) are going to be fatal— collision if you drive after
system, including pairing and using careless and make mistakes. drinking.
a cell phone. Anticipate what they might do Do not drink and drive or ride with
and be ready. a driver who has been drinking.
If equipped, refer to the navigation
manual for information on that . Allow enough following distance Ride home in a cab; or if you are
system, including pairing and using between you and the driver in with a group, designate a driver
a cell phone. front of you. who will not drink.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Control of a Vehicle
Drunk Driving
Braking, steering, and accelerating
Death and injury associated with are important factors in helping to
drinking and driving is a global control a vehicle while driving.
tragedy.
Braking If the engine ever stops while the Curve Tips

vehicle is being driven, brake
Braking action involves perception . Take curves at a reasonable
normally but do not pump the
time and reaction time. Deciding to speed.
brakes. Doing so could make the
push the brake pedal is perception pedal harder to push down. If the . Reduce speed before entering a
time. Actually doing it is engine stops, there will be some curve.
reaction time. power brake assist but it will be . Maintain a reasonable steady
Average driver reaction time is used when the brake is applied. speed through the curve.
about three-quarters of a second. In Once the power assist is used up, it
that time, a vehicle moving at can take longer to stop and the . Wait until the vehicle is out of
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m brake pedal will be harder to push. the curve before accelerating
(66 ft), which could be a lot of gently into the straightaway.
distance in an emergency. Steering Steering in Emergencies
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind Hydraulic Power Steering . There are some situations when
include: steering around a problem may
Your vehicle has hydraulic
. Keep enough distance between power steering. It may require be more effective than braking.
you and the vehicle in front maintenance. See Power Steering . Holding both sides of the
of you. Fluid on page 10‑25. steering wheel allows you to turn
. Avoid needless heavy braking. If power steering assist is lost due 180 degrees without removing
to a system malfunction, the vehicle a hand.
. Keep pace with traffic.
can be steered, but may require . The Antilock Brake System
increased effort. (ABS) allows steering while
See your dealer if there is a braking.
problem.
Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Then turn the steering wheel to skids are always possible.
go straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
There are three types of skids that vehicle to go. The vehicle may
correspond to the vehicle's three straighten out. Be ready for a
control systems: second skid if it occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
The vehicle's right wheels can drop rolling. driving according to weather
off the edge of a road onto the conditions. Stopping distance
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Steering or Cornering
Skid — too much speed or can be longer and vehicle
these tips: control can be affected when
steering in a curve causes tires
1. Ease off the accelerator and to slip and lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
then, if there is nothing in the snow, ice, gravel, or other
way, steer the vehicle so that it
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
pavement. wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering, Controlling the vehicle is the key to
. Make sure all underbody
acceleration, or braking, successful off-road driving. One of shields, if equipped, are properly
including reducing vehicle speed the best ways to control the vehicle attached.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any is to control the speed. . Know the local laws that apply to
sudden changes could cause off-road driving.
the tires to slide.
{ WARNING To gain more ground clearance if
Remember: Antilock brakes help needed, it may be necessary to
avoid only the braking skid. When driving off-road, bouncing
remove the front fascia lower
and quick changes in direction
air dam.
Off-Road Driving can easily throw you out of
position. This could cause you to Notice: Operating the vehicle for
Off-Road Driving lose control and crash. You and extended periods without the
your passengers should always front fascia lower air dam
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be
wear safety belts. installed can cause improper air
used for off-road driving. Vehicles
flow to the engine. Re‐attach the
without four-wheel drive and
front fascia air dam after off-road
vehicles not equipped with All
Before Driving Off-Road driving.
Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)
tires must not be driven off-road . Have all necessary maintenance
except on a level, solid surface. To and service work completed.
contact the tire manufacturer for . Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,
more information about the original and check inflation pressure in
equipment tires, see the Limited all tires, including the spare,
Warranty and Owner Assistance if equipped.
Information manual.
. Read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this
manual.
Loading the Vehicle for For more information about loading Driving on Hills
Off-Road Driving the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits
Driving safely on hills requires good
on page 9‑19 and Tires on
judgment and an understanding of
page 10‑47.
{ WARNING what the vehicle can and cannot do.
Environmental Concerns
. Unsecured cargo on the load
floor can be tossed about . Always use established trails, { WARNING
when driving over rough roads, and areas that have been
Many hills are simply too steep
terrain. You or your set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all for any vehicle. Driving up hills
passengers can be struck by
posted regulations. can cause the vehicle to stall.
flying objects. Secure the
Driving down hills can cause loss
cargo properly. . Do not damage shrubs, flowers, of control. Driving across hills can
. Keep cargo in the cargo area trees, or grasses or disturb cause a rollover. You could be
as far forward and as low as wildlife. injured or killed. Do not drive on
possible. The heaviest things . Do not park over things that steep hills.
should be on the floor, burn. See Parking over Things
forward of the rear axle. That Burn on page 9‑34.
Before driving on a hill, assess
. Heavy loads on the roof raise the steepness, traction, and
the vehicle's center of gravity, obstructions. If the terrain ahead
making it more likely to roll cannot be seen, get out of the
over. You can be seriously or vehicle and walk the hill before
fatally injured if the vehicle driving further.
rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on
the roof.
When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firm
{ WARNING { WARNING
grip on the steering wheel. Driving to the top of a hill at high If the vehicle has the two‐speed
. Maintain a slow speed. speed can cause an accident. automatic transfer case, shifting
.
There could be a drop-off, the transfer case to N (Neutral)
When possible, drive straight up
embankment, cliff, or even can cause your vehicle to roll
or down the hill.
another vehicle. You could be even if the transmission is in
. Slow down when approaching seriously injured or killed. As you P (Park) for an automatic
the top of the hill. near the top of a hill, slow down transmission or any gear position
. Use headlamps even during the and stay alert. for a manual transmission. This is
day to make the vehicle more because the N (Neutral) position
visible. . Never go downhill forward or on the transfer case overrides the
backward with either the transmission. You or someone
transmission or transfer case in else could be injured. If leaving
N (Neutral). The brakes could the vehicle, set the parking brake
overheat and you could lose and shift the transmission to
control. P (Park) for an automatic
transmission or any gear position
for a manual transmission. Shift
the transfer case to any position
but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keep If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
. If you cannot make it up the
the vehicle headed straight hill, back straight down
down. Use a low gear because 1. Apply the brakes to stop the the hill.
the engine will work with the vehicle, and then apply the
parking brake.
. Never back down a hill in
brakes to slow the vehicle and N (Neutral) using only the
help keep the vehicle under 2. Shift into P (Park) for an brake.
control. automatic transmission or
1 (First) for a manual
. The vehicle can roll
{ WARNING transmission and then restart
the engine.
backward quickly and you
could lose control.
Heavy braking when going down . If driving uphill when the
. If driving downhill when the
a hill can cause your brakes to vehicle stalls, shift to vehicle stalls, shift to a
overheat and fade. This could R (Reverse), release the lower gear, release the
cause loss of control and you or parking brake, and back parking brake, and drive
others could be injured or killed. straight down. straight down the hill.
Apply the brakes lightly when . Never try to turn the vehicle
descending a hill and use a low
around. If the hill is steep
gear to keep vehicle speed under
enough to stall the vehicle,
control. it is steep enough to cause
it to roll over.
3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted

. Surface conditions can be a
after stalling, set the parking problem. Loose gravel, muddy { WARNING
brake, shift an automatic spots, or even wet grass can
transmission into P (Park) or a cause the tires to slip sideways, Getting out of the vehicle on the
manual transmission into downhill. If the vehicle slips downhill side when stopped
1 (First), and turn the vehicle off. sideways, it can hit something across an incline is dangerous.
that will trip it – a rock, a rut, If the vehicle rolls over, you could
3.1. Leave the vehicle and etc. – and roll over. be crushed or killed. Always get
seek help. out on the uphill side of the
. Hidden obstacles can make the
3.2. Stay clear of the path the steepness of the incline more vehicle and stay well clear of the
vehicle would take if it severe. If a rock is driven across rollover path.
rolled downhill. with the uphill wheels, or if the
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle downhill wheels drop into a rut
across the incline of the hill. or depression, the vehicle can tilt
A hill that can be driven straight even more.
up or down might be too steep to . If an incline must be driven
drive across. Driving across an across, and the vehicle starts to
incline puts more weight on the slide, turn downhill. This should
downhill wheels which could help straighten out the vehicle
cause a downhill slide or a and prevent the side slipping.
rollover.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Notice: Do not drive through

or Ice { WARNING standing water if it is deep
enough to cover the wheel hubs,
Use a low gear when driving in Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, axles or exhaust pipe. Deep water
mud – the deeper the mud, the or rivers can be dangerous. Ice can damage the axle and other
lower the gear. Keep the vehicle conditions vary greatly and the vehicle parts.
moving to avoid getting stuck. vehicle could fall through the ice;
you and your passengers could If the standing water is not too deep,
Traction changes when driving on drive slowly through it. At faster
sand. On loose sand, such as on drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
speeds, water splashes on the
beaches or sand dunes, the tires surfaces only.
ignition system and the vehicle can
tend to sink into the sand. This stall. Stalling can also occur if you
affects steering, accelerating, and Driving in Water get the exhaust pipe under water.
braking. Drive at a reduced speed While the exhaust pipe is under
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. { WARNING water, you will not be able to start
the engine. When going through
Traction is reduced on hard packed Driving through rushing water can water, the brakes get wet, and it
snow and ice and it is easy to lose be dangerous. Deep water can might take longer to stop. See
control. Reduce vehicle speed when sweep your vehicle downstream Driving on Wet Roads on
driving on hard packed snow and you and your passengers page 9‑12.
and ice. could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires.
Traction could be lost, and the
vehicle could roll over. Do not
drive through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Remove any brush or debris that Rain and wet roads can reduce
has collected on the underbody, vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
or chassis, or under the hood. ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through
These accumulations can be a fire Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
hazard. of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
After operation in mud or sand, driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
have the brake linings cleaned and deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
checked. These substances can ignore police warnings and be
cause glazing and uneven braking. { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive
Check the body structure, steering, through flowing water.
suspension, wheels, tires, and Wet brakes can cause crashes.
exhaust system for damage and They might not work as well in a
check the fuel lines and cooling quick stop and could cause
system for any leakage. pulling to one side. You could
More frequent maintenance service lose control of the vehicle.
is required. Refer to the After driving through a large
Maintenance Schedule on puddle of water or a car/vehicle
page 11‑3 for more information. wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
Hydroplaning Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to
can build up under the vehicle's weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving.
tires so they actually ride on the . Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
water. This can happen if the road is safe place to park the vehicle
wet enough and you are going fast . Pass with caution. and rest.
enough. When the vehicle is . Keep windshield wiping
hydroplaning, it has little or no Other driving tips include:
equipment in good shape.
contact with the road. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
There is no hard and fast rule about reservoir filled.
. Keep the interior
hydroplaning. The best advice is to temperature cool.
slow down when the road is wet.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑47. the road ahead and to the sides.
. Turn off cruise control.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads

{ WARNING { WARNING
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they or with the ignition off is
driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would dangerous. The brakes will have
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in then have poor braking or even to do all the work of slowing down
good shape. none going down a hill. You could and they could get so hot that
crash. Shift down to let the engine they would not work well. You
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep would then have poor braking or
tires, cooling system, and downhill slope. even none going down a hill. You
transmission. could crash. Always have the
. Shift to a lower gear when going engine running and the vehicle in
down steep or long hills. gear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑44 improves vehicle
center of the road. Drive at Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
speeds that let you stay in your slippery roads, but apply the brakes
own lane. Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement.
. Be alert on top of hills; road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
something could be in your lane Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for
(stalled car, accident). (32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
. Pay attention to special road fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
signs (falling rocks area, winding Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
roads, long grades, passing or freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
no-passing zones) and take treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
appropriate action. Drive with caution, whatever the clear. Avoid sudden steering
condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice.
quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control on slippery
and makes the surface under the surfaces.
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
serious situation. Stay with the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
vehicle unless there is help nearby. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
If possible, use the Roadside cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Assistance Program (U.S. and inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
Assistance Program (Mexico) on cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
page 13‑10. To get help and keep cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
everyone in the vehicle safe: death. to the highest setting. See
. Turn on the hazard warning “Climate Control Systems” in
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
flashers. the Index.
. Clear away snow from around
. Tie a red cloth to an outside For more information about
the base of your vehicle,
mirror. carbon monoxide, see Engine
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe. Exhaust on page 9‑34.
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does Run the engine for short periods
not collect there. only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
. Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
(Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle Is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm { WARNING
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and you
until help arrives but only when you See “Rocking Your vehicle to get It or others could be injured. The
feel really uncomfortable from the Out” later in this section. vehicle can overheat, causing an
cold. Moving about to keep warm If stuck too severely for the traction engine compartment fire or other
also helps. system to free the vehicle, turn the damage. Spin the wheels as little
traction system off and use the as possible and avoid going
If it takes some time for help to
rocking method. above 55 km/h (35 mph).
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs For information about using tire
faster than the idle speed. This chains on the vehicle, see Tire
keeps the battery charged to restart Chains on page 10‑68.
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Rocking the Vehicle to get Recovery Hooks

It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and { WARNING
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. For four-wheel drive Never pull on recovery hooks
vehicles, shift into 4HI. Turn off any from the side. The hooks could
traction system. Shift back and forth break and you and others could
between R (Reverse) and a forward be injured. When using recovery
gear, or with a manual transmission, hooks, always pull the vehicle
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and straight out.
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the Notice: Never use recovery
wheels stop spinning before shifting hooks to tow the vehicle. Your
gears. Release the accelerator vehicle could be damaged and it
pedal while shifting, and press would not be covered by
lightly on the accelerator pedal warranty.
when the transmission is in gear. For vehicles with recovery hooks at
Slowly spinning the wheels in the the front of the vehicle, you can use
forward and reverse directions them if you are stuck off-road and
causes a rocking motion that could need to be pulled to some place
free the vehicle. If that does not get where you can continue driving.
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out.
Recovery hooks can be used, if the
vehicle has them. If the vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing
the Vehicle on page 10‑91.
Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING Label
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any
carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross
vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating
includes the weight of all (GVWR), or either the
occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on your vehicle show This can cause systems to
how much weight it may break and change the way the
properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
the Certification/Tire label. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B‐pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door latch
post. Vehicle's without a center
pillar, like extended cab models,
will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the
driver side extended cab door,
above the door latch post. The There is also important 3. Subtract the combined
Tire and Loading Information information on the Certification/ weight of the driver and
label shows the number of Tire label. It tells you the Gross passengers from XXX kg or
occupant seating positions (A), Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) XXX lbs.
and the maximum vehicle and the Gross Axle Weight 4. The resulting figure equals
capacity weight (B) in kilograms Rating (GAWR) for the front and the available amount of cargo
and pounds. rear axles. See “Certification/ and luggage load capacity.
The Tire and Loading Tire Label” later in this section. For example, if the “XXX”
Information label also shows the Steps for Determining Correct amount equals 1400 lbs and
size of the original equipment Load Limit there will be five 150 lb
tires (C) and the recommended 1. Locate the statement passengers in your vehicle,
cold tire inflation pressures (D). “The combined weight of the amount of available cargo
For more information on tires occupants and cargo should and luggage load capacity is
and inflation see Tires on never exceed XXX kg or 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
page 10‑47 and Tire Pressure XXX lbs” on your vehicle's = 650 lbs).
on page 10‑54. placard. 5. Determine the combined
2. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
weight of the driver and being loaded on the vehicle.
passengers that will be riding That weight may not safely
in your vehicle. exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing on
page 9‑62 for important
information on towing a
trailer, towing safety, and Example 1 Example 2
trailering tips. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(300 lbs) (750 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight =
Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs) 113 kg (250 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Certification/Tire Label

Loading Information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
cargo, and any accessories or
equipment added to your vehicle
after it left the factory should
never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Label Example
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
A vehicle specific Certification/
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ Tire label is attached to the
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg bottom section of the driver side
(1,000 lbs) center pillar (B-pillar) or on the
C. Available Cargo Weight = end of the driver side instrument
0 kg (0 lbs) panel. Vehicles without a center
pillar, like extended cab models,
will have the Certification/Tire
label attached to the edge of the
driver side, extended cab door,
below the door latch post. The
label shows the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The Never exceed the GVWR for

GVWR includes the weight of your vehicle, or the GAWR for { WARNING
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, either the front or rear axle. Do not load the vehicle any
cargo, and trailer tongue weight, If the load is heavy, it should be heavier than the Gross
if pulling a trailer. spread out. Vehicle Weight Rating
The Certification/Tire label also Similar appearing vehicles may (GVWR), or either the
tells you the maximum weights have different GVWRs and maximum front or rear Gross
for the front and rear axles, capacity weights. Please note Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
called Gross Axle Weight your vehicle's Certification/Tire This can cause systems to
Rating (GAWR). To find out the label or consult your dealer for break and change the way the
actual loads on your front and additional details. vehicle handles. This could
rear axles, you need to go to a cause loss of control and a
weigh station and weigh your crash. Overloading can also
vehicle. Your dealer can help shorten the life of the vehicle.
you with this. Be sure to spread
out your load equally on both Using heavier suspension
sides of the centerline. components to get added
durability might not change your
weight ratings. Ask your dealer
to help you load your vehicle the
right way.
Notice: Overloading the

vehicle may cause damage. { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Repairs would not be covered Things you put inside the
. Do not leave an
by the vehicle warranty. Do vehicle can strike and injure unsecured child restraint
not overload the vehicle. people in a sudden stop or in the vehicle.
If you put things inside your turn, or in a crash. . When you carry something
vehicle — like suitcases, tools, . Put things in the cargo inside the vehicle, secure
packages, or anything area of the vehicle. Try to it whenever you can.
else — they will go as fast as the spread the weight evenly. . Do not leave a seat folded
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
. Never stack heavier down unless you need to.
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going. things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that There is also important loading
some of them are above information for off-road driving in
the tops of the seats. this manual. See “Loading Your
(Continued) Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under
Off-Road Driving on page 9‑6.
Remember not to exceed the
Gross Axle Weight
rating (GAWR) of the front or
rear axle.
Two-Tiered Loading Add-On Equipment Truck-Camper Loading

For vehicles with a six foot bed, When you carry removable Information
an upper load platform can be items, you may need to put a The vehicle was neither
created by positioning four 5 cm limit on how many people you designed nor intended to carry a
(2 inches) by 15 cm (6 inches) carry inside your vehicle. Be slide-in type camper.
wooden planks across the width sure to weigh your vehicle
of the pickup box. The planks before you buy and install the Notice: Adding a slide-in
must be inserted in the pickup new equipment. camper or similar equipment
box depressions. to the vehicle can damage it,
Notice: Overloading the and the repairs would not be
When using this upper load vehicle may cause damage. covered by the vehicle
platform, be sure the load is Repairs would not be covered warranty. Do not install a
securely tied down to prevent it by the vehicle warranty. Do slide-in camper or similar
from shifting. The load's center not overload the vehicle. equipment on the vehicle.
of gravity should be positioned Remember not to exceed
in a zone over the rear axle. the Gross Axle Weight
Any load that extends beyond Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
the vehicle's taillamp area must A reinforcement kit for mounting
be properly marked according to a toolbox is recommended. See
local laws and regulations. your dealer.
Remember not to exceed
the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

. Avoid making hard stops for
Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Ignition Positions
Operating so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this
will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every
if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake
. Keep the vehicle speed at linings.
88 km/h (55 mph) or less for . Do not tow a trailer during
the first 805 km (500 miles). break-in. See Trailer Towing
. Do not drive at any one on page 9‑62 for the trailer
constant speed, fast or slow, towing capabilities of the
vehicle and more The ignition switch has four different
for the first 805 km positions.
(500 miles). Do not make information.
full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed To shift out of P (Park), turn the
downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
slow the vehicle. increased. regular brake pedal.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ If the vehicle must be shut off in an

LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is emergency: { WARNING
stopped, turn the ignition switch to 1. Brake using a firm and steady
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. Turning off the vehicle while
pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) brakes repeatedly. This may
will remain active. See Retained assist in the brake and steering
deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags.
Accessory Power (RAP) on increased brake pedal force.
page 9‑31. While driving, only shut the
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This vehicle off in an emergency.
This position locks the ignition. can be done while the vehicle is
It also locks the transmission on moving. After shifting to neutral,
automatic transmission vehicles. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
It locks the steering wheel on and must be shut off while driving,
the vehicle to a safe location.
manual transmission vehicles. The turn the ignition to ACC/
key can only be removed in 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift ACCESSORY.
LOCK/OFF. to P (Park) with an automatic
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, or neutral with a
Do not turn the engine off when the transmission, the shift lever must be
manual transmission. Turn the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
loss of power assist in the brake to LOCK/OFF.
and steering systems and disable 4. Set the parking brake. See
The steering can bind with the
the airbags. Parking Brake on page 9‑45.
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs
service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the If you leave the key in the ACC/ Starting the Engine
position in which you can operate ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
the electrical accessories or items with the engine off, the battery could Place the transmission in the
plugged into the accessory power be drained. You may not be able to proper gear.
outlets. On automatic transmission start your vehicle if the battery is Automatic Transmission
vehicles, this position unlocks the allowed to drain for an extended
ignition. On manual transmission period of time. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
vehicles, it unlocks the ignition and N (Neutral). The engine will not start
D (START): This is the position that in any other position. To restart the
steering wheel . Use this position if starts the engine. When the engine
the vehicle must be pushed or vehicle when it is already moving,
starts, release the key. The ignition use N (Neutral) only.
towed. switch returns to ON/RUN for
C (ON/RUN): This position can be driving. Notice: Do not try to shift to
used to operate the electrical P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
A warning tone will sound when the If you do, you could damage the
accessories and to display some driver door is opened, the ignition is
instrument panel cluster warning transmission. Shift to P (Park)
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF only when the vehicle is stopped.
and indicator lights. This position and the key is in the ignition.
can also be used for service and
Manual Transmission
diagnostics, and to verify the proper
operation of the malfunction The shift lever should be in
indicator lamp as may be required N (Neutral) and the parking brake
for emission inspection purposes. engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
The switch stays in this position down to the floor and start the
when the engine is running. The engine. The vehicle will not start if
transmission is also unlocked in this the clutch pedal is not all the
position on automatic transmission way down.
vehicles.
Starting Procedure To prevent gear damage, this When the engine starts, let go of
system also prevents cranking if the key and accelerator. If the
1. With your foot off the accelerator
the engine is already running. vehicle starts briefly but then
pedal, turn the ignition key to
Engine cranking can be stopped stops again, repeat the
START. When the engine starts,
by turning the ignition switch to procedure. This clears the extra
let go of the key. The idle speed
ACC/ACCESSORY or gasoline from the engine. Do not
will go down as the engine
LOCK/OFF. race the engine immediately
warms. Do not race the engine
Notice: Cranking the engine for after starting it. Operate the
immediately after starting it.
long periods of time, by returning engine and transmission gently
Operate the engine and
the key to the START position until the oil warms up and
transmission gently to allow the
immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts.
oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts. ended, can overheat and damage Notice: The engine is designed to
the cranking motor, and drain the work with the electronics in the
The vehicle has a
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds vehicle. If you add electrical parts
Computer-Controlled Cranking
between each try, to let the or accessories, you could change
System. This feature assists in
cranking motor cool down. the way the engine operates.
starting the engine and protects
2. If the engine does not start Before adding electrical
components. If the ignition key is
after 5‐10 seconds, especially in equipment, check with your
turned to the START position,
very cold weather (below 0°F dealer. If you do not, the engine
and then released when the
or −18°C), it could be flooded might not perform properly. Any
engine begins cranking, the
with too much gasoline. Push resulting damage would not be
engine will continue cranking for
the accelerator pedal all the way covered by the vehicle warranty.
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does to the floor and holding it there
not start and the key is held in as you hold the key in START
START for many seconds, for a maximum of 15 seconds.
cranking will be stopped after Wait at least 15 seconds
15 seconds to prevent cranking between each try, to allow the
motor damage. cranking motor to cool.
Engine Heater To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.
{ WARNING
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better 2. Open the hood and unwrap the Plugging the cord into an
fuel economy during engine electrical cord. The cord is ungrounded outlet could cause an
warm-up in cold weather conditions located in the engine electrical shock. Also, the wrong
at or below −18°C (0°F ). Vehicles compartment behind the kind of extension cord could
with an engine coolant heater underhood fuse block on the overheat and cause a fire. You
should be plugged in at least driver side of the vehicle. could be seriously injured. Plug
four hours before starting. An the cord into a properly grounded
internal thermostat in the plug-end 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet. three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
of the cord may exist which will If the cord will not reach, use a
prevent engine coolant heater heavy-duty three-prong extension
operation at temperatures cord rated for at least 15 amps.
above −18°C (0°F).
4. Before starting the engine, be

sure to unplug and store the
cord to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park

Power (RAP) (Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING
These vehicle accessories can be If you have four-wheel drive, the
used for up to 20 minutes after the { WARNING vehicle will be free to roll — even
if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if
engine is turned off:
It can be dangerous to get out of the transfer case is in Neutral. So,
. Audio System the vehicle if the shift lever is not be sure the transfer case is in a
. Wipers fully in P (Park) with the parking drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or
. brake firmly set. The vehicle can four-wheel high (4H) or
Power Windows
roll. If you have left the engine four-wheel low (4L) — not in
These features work when running, the vehicle can move Neutral.
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ suddenly. You or others could be
ACCESSORY. Once the key is injured. To be sure the vehicle will
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
not move, even when you are on by pulling the lever toward you
power to these features continue to fairly level ground, use the steps
work for up to 20 minutes or until a and moving it up as far as it
that follow. If you are pulling a will go.
door is opened.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑58. 3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with
1. Hold the brake pedal down with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
your right foot and set the
with the key, the vehicle is in
parking brake.
P (Park).
See Parking Brake on page 9‑45
for more information.
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave the vehicle with seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Engine Running (Automatic the engine running, be sure the Into Park (Automatic Transmission)”
Transmission) vehicle is in P (Park) and the in this section.
parking brake is firmly set before When you are ready to drive, move
you leave it. After you have moved
{ WARNING the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
you release the parking brake.
It can be dangerous to leave the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever If torque lock does occur, you may
vehicle with the engine running. need to have another vehicle push
away from P (Park) without first
The vehicle could move suddenly yours a little uphill to take some of
pulling it toward you. If you can, the
if the shift lever is not fully in shift lever was not fully locked into the pressure from the parking pawl
P (Park) with the parking brake P (Park). in the transmission, so you can pull
firmly set. And, if you leave the the shift lever out of P (Park).
vehicle with the engine running, it Torque Lock (Automatic
could overheat and even catch Transmission) Shifting out of Park
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
If you are parking on a hill and you (Automatic Transmission)
do not shift the transmission into
with the engine running. P (Park) properly, the weight The vehicle has an automatic
of the vehicle may put too much transmission shift lock control
force on the parking pawl in the system. You have to fully apply the
transmission. You may find it difficult brake pedal before you can shift
to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). from P (Park) when the ignition is
This is called torque lock. To ON/RUN. See Automatic
prevent torque lock, set the parking Transmission on page 9‑36.
brake and then shift into P (Park)
properly before you leave the driver
The shift lock control system is To shift out of P (Park) use the Parking (Manual
designed to do the following: following:
Transmission)
. Prevent the ignition key from 1. Apply the brake pedal.
being removed unless the shift If the vehicle has a manual
2. Move the shift lever to the transmission, before you get out of
lever is in P (Park). desired position. the vehicle, move the shift lever into
. Prevent movement of the shift If you still are unable to shift out of R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
lever out of P (Park), unless the P (Park): parking brake. Once the shift lever
ignition is in ON/RUN and the has been placed into R (Reverse)
brake pedal is applied. 1. Ease the pressure on the shift with the clutch pedal pressed in,
lever. turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
The shift lock control system is
always functional except in the case 2. While holding down the brake remove the key and release the
of a dead battery or low voltage pedal, push the shift lever all the clutch.
(less than 9 V) battery. way into P (Park). If you are parking on a hill, or if the
If the vehicle has an uncharged 3. Move the shift lever to the vehicle is pulling a trailer, see
battery or a battery with low voltage, desired position. Driving Characteristics and Towing
try charging or jump starting the Tips on page 9‑58.
If you are still having a problem
battery. See Jump Starting on shifting, then have the vehicle
page 10‑87 for more information. serviced.
Parking over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

That Burn
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
{ WARNING Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
{ WARNING { WARNING
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of Four-wheel drive vehicles with the
engine running. But if you ever have the vehicle if the automatic transfer case in N (Neutral) will
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully allow the vehicle to roll, even if
in P (Park) with the parking brake the automatic transmission shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do lever is in P (Park). So, be sure
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the the transfer case is in a drive
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you gear — not in N (Neutral). Always
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the set the parking brake.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others Follow the proper steps to be sure
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the the vehicle will not move. See
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when Shifting Into Park (Automatic
It can cause unconsciousness it is on fairly level ground, always Transmission) on page 9‑31.
and even death. Never run the set the parking brake and move
the automatic transmission shift If pulling a trailer, see Driving
engine in an enclosed area that Characteristics and Towing Tips on
has no fresh air ventilation. For lever to P (Park), or the manual
page 9‑58.
more information, see Engine transmission shift lever to Neutral.
Exhaust on page 9‑34.
Automatic disconnect the battery cable from

the battery to prevent discharging WARNING (Continued)
Transmission the battery.
always set the parking brake and
There are several different positions move the shift lever to P (Park).
for the shift lever. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9‑31.
rear wheels. It is the best position to If you are pulling a trailer, see
use when you start the engine Driving Characteristics and
because the vehicle cannot move Towing Tips on page 9‑58.
easily.
The vehicle has a shift lever on the
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
steering column.
{ WARNING P (Park) before starting the engine.
It features an electronic shift The vehicle has an automatic
position indicator within the It is dangerous to get out of the
transmission shift lock control
instrument cluster. This display is vehicle if the shift lever is not fully system. You must fully apply the
powered anytime the shift lever is in P (Park) with the parking brake brake pedal before you can shift
capable of being moved out of firmly set. The vehicle can roll. from P (Park) when the ignition key
P (Park). This means that if the is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
Do not leave the vehicle when the
ignition is turned off, but not in of P (Park), ease pressure on the
engine is running unless you
LOCK/OFF, there will be a small shift lever by pushing the shift lever
current drain on the battery which have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can all the way into P (Park) as you
could discharge the battery over a maintain brake application. Then
period of time. If you need to leave move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the move the shift lever into another
the key in the ignition but not in gear. See Shifting out of Park
LOCK/OFF for an extended period, vehicle will not move, even when
(Automatic Transmission) on
it is recommended that you you are on fairly level ground,
page 9‑32.
(Continued)
R (Reverse): Use this gear to D (Drive): This position is for

back up. { WARNING normal driving. It provides the best
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) fuel economy. If you need more
Shifting into a drive gear while the power for passing, and you are:
while the vehicle is moving engine is running at high speed is
forward could damage the . Going less than about 55 km/h
dangerous. Unless your foot is
transmission. The repairs would firmly on the brake pedal, the (35 mph), push the accelerator
not be covered by the vehicle vehicle could move very rapidly. pedal about halfway down.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only You could lose control and hit . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
after the vehicle is stopped. more, push the accelerator all
people or objects. Do not shift
To rock your vehicle back and forth into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
to get out of snow, ice, or sand is running at high speed. The transmission will shift down
without damaging the transmission, to the next gear and the vehicle
see If the Vehicle Is Stuck on will have more power.
page 9‑17. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine Downshifting the transmission in
N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may slippery road conditions could result
engine does not connect with the damage the transmission. The in skidding, see “Skidding” under
wheels. To restart the engine when repairs would not be covered by Loss of Control on page 9‑5.
the vehicle is are already moving, the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
use N (Neutral) only. engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
3 (Third): This position is also used 1 (First): This position reduces Manual Transmission
for normal driving. However, it vehicle speed even more than
reduces vehicle speed more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes.
D (Drive) without using the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills,
You might choose 3 (Third) instead or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, lever is put in 1 (First) while the
winding roads, or when towing a vehicle is moving forward, the
trailer, so there is less shifting transmission will not shift into first
between gears and when going gear until the vehicle is going slowly
down a steep hill. enough.
2 (Second): This position reduces Notice: Spinning the tires or
vehicle speed even more than holding the vehicle in one place
3 (Third) without using the brakes. on a hill using only the
You can use 2 (Second) to help accelerator pedal may damage
control vehicle speed on steep the transmission. The repair will
mountain roads, but then you would not be covered by the vehicle This is your shift pattern.
also want to use the brakes off warranty. If you are stuck, do not Here is how to operate the manual
and on. spin the tires. When stopping on transmission:
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place. 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
slowly press down on the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when you To stop, let up on the accelerator Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
are going less than 30 km/h pedal and press the brake pedal. while the vehicle is moving
(20 mph). If you have come to a Just before the vehicle stops, press forward could damage the
complete stop and it is hard to shift the clutch pedal and the brake transmission. The repairs would
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in pedal, and shift to Neutral. not be covered by the vehicle
Neutral and let up on the clutch. Neutral: Use this position when warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
Then press the clutch pedal back you start or idle the engine. after the vehicle is stopped.
down and shift into 1 (First). Use R (Reverse), along with the
R (Reverse): To back up, press the
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal clutch pedal. After the vehicle stops, parking brake, for parking the
as you let up on the accelerator shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up vehicle.
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). on the clutch pedal as you press the
Then, slowly let up on the clutch Shift Speeds
accelerator pedal. If it is hard to
pedal as you press the accelerator shift, let the shift lever return to
pedal. Neutral and release the clutch { WARNING
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): pedal. Then press the clutch again If you skip a gear when you
Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and and shift into R (Reverse). Do not downshift, you could lose control
5 (Fifth) the same way you do for attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior to of the vehicle. You could injure
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the shifting into R (Reverse). The
yourself or others. Do not shift
clutch pedal as you press the transmission has a lock out feature
down more than one gear at a
accelerator pedal. which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to
R (Reverse) gear shift. time when you downshift.
Drive Systems Notice: Driving on clean, dry

pavement in four-wheel drive for
Notice: If the vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the compact
an extended period of time can spare tire is installed on the
Four-Wheel Drive cause premature wear on the vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive drive until you can have the flat
you can send the engine's driving on clean, dry pavement in tire repaired and/or replaced. You
power to all four wheels for Four-Wheel Drive for extended could damage the vehicle, and
extra traction. To get the best periods of time. the repair costs would not be
performance out of four-wheel Notice: If the vehicle has covered by your warranty. Never
drive, you must be familiar with its four-wheel drive and a different use four-wheel drive when the
operation. Read this section before size spare tire is installed, do not compact spare tire is installed on
using four-wheel drive. You should drive in four-wheel drive until the the vehicle.
use two-wheel drive high for most flat tire is repaired and/or
normal driving conditions. replaced. The vehicle could be
damaged and the repairs would
not be covered by the warranty.
Never use four-wheel drive when
a different size spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The transfer case buttons are
located to the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument panel.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings

{ WARNING
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions Shifting the transfer case to
2 m 4 m 4 n N
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
Normal YES to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). You or someone else
Severe YES could be seriously injured. Be
Extreme YES sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in
Vehicle in Tow* YES
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑91 or Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑45.
page 10‑91 for further information.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
Shifting into Four‐Wheel Low Use these buttons to shift into and when towing the vehicle.
will turn Traction Control and out of four-wheel drive. You can
StabiliTrak® off. See Traction choose from the following: 4 m (Four-Wheel High): This
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑47 setting engages the front axle to
and StabiliTrak® System on 2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting
help drive the vehicle. Use
page 9‑48 for more information. is for driving in most street and four-wheel high when you need
highway situations. The front axle is extra traction, such as on snowy or
not engaged in two-wheel drive. icy roads, or in most off-road
situations.
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting Shifting from Two-Wheel High to Shifting from Two-Wheel High or
also engages the front axle to give Four-Wheel High Four-Wheel High to
you extra traction. It sends the Press and release the Four-Wheel Four-Wheel Low
maximum power to all four wheels. High button. This can be done at To shift from Two-Wheel High or
You might choose four-wheel low if any speed, and the front axle will Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel
you were driving off-road in sand, lock automatically. Low, the vehicle must be stopped or
mud, or deep snow and while moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
climbing or descending steep hills. Shifting from Four-Wheel High to with the transmission in N (Neutral)
Two-Wheel High for an automatic transmission or the
Shifting into Four‐Wheel Low will
turn Traction Control and Press and release the Two-Wheel clutch pedal pressed for a manual
StabiliTrak® off. See Traction High button. This can be done at transmission. The preferred method
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑47 any speed, and the front axle will for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is
and StabiliTrak® System on unlock automatically. to have your vehicle moving
page 9‑48 for more information. It is normal to hear and feel the 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
Indicator lights in the buttons show vehicle's transfer case shift into Press and release the Four-Wheel
you which setting you are in. The Four-Wheel High. If you shift with Low button. You must wait for the
indicator lights will come on briefly the vehicle stopped, the indicator Four-Wheel Low indicator light to
when you turn on the ignition and light may still flash slowly. It may be stop flashing and stay on before
one will stay on the selected setting. necessary to shift the transmission shifting the transmission into gear or
If the lights do not come on, you momentarily into R (Reverse) and releasing the clutch pedal.
should take the vehicle in for D (Drive), for an automatic If the Four-Wheel Low button is
service. An indicator light will flash transmission, or R (Reverse) and pressed when the vehicle is in gear
while shifting. It will stay on when 1 (First) for a manual transmission and/or moving faster than 5 km/h
the shift is completed. to have the light stop flashing. (3 mph), the Four-Wheel Low
If the transfer case does not shift, it indicator light will flash for
will return to the last chosen setting. 30 seconds and not complete the
shift.
Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to If the Four-Wheel High or 4. Shift the transfer case to
Two-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High button is pressed Two-Wheel High.
Four-Wheel High when the vehicle is in gear and/or 5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph), High and Four-Wheel Low
Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel buttons at the same time for
High, the vehicle must be stopped High indicator light will flash for 10 seconds. The N (Neutral) light
or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) 30 seconds but not complete the will come on when the transfer
with the transmission in N (Neutral) shift. case shift to N (Neutral) is
for an automatic transmission or the Shifting to Neutral complete.
clutch pedal pressed for a manual 6. Press and hold the regular brake
transmission. The preferred method Use N (Neutral) when you plan to
tow the vehicle. See Recreational pedal and shift the transmission
for shifting out of Four-Wheel Low is to R (Reverse) for one second,
to have your vehicle moving Vehicle Towing on page 10‑91 for
towing instructions. To shift the then shift the transmission to
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). D (Drive) for one second,
transfer case into N (Neutral) do the
Press and release the Four-Wheel following: or 1 (First) for vehicles with
High or Two-Wheel High button. You manual transmissions, and let
must wait for the Four-Wheel High 1. Set the parking brake. out the clutch to insure the
or Two-Wheel High indicator light to 2. Start the vehicle. transfer case is in N (Neutral).
stop flashing and stay on before 3. Press the regular brake pedal If the transfer case is not in
shifting the transmission into gear or and shift the transmission in N (Neutral), repeat this
releasing the clutch pedal. N (Neutral), or press in the clutch procedure starting at Step 3.
for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
7. Turn the engine off by turning 3. Shift the transmission to Brakes

the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. N (Neutral), or press the clutch
pedal for vehicles with a manual
8. Place the transmission shift
transmission. Antilock Brake
lever in P (Park), or 1 (First) for
vehicles that have a manual 4. Press the button for the desired
System (ABS)
transmission. transfer case shift position This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel System (ABS), an advanced
High, or Four-Wheel Low). electronic braking system that helps
Shifting Out of Neutral 5. After the transfer case has prevent a braking skid.
After towing the vehicle, you will shifted out of N (Neutral), the When the engine is started and the
have to shift out of N (Neutral) in indicator light will go out. vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
order to drive. To shift out of 6. Release the parking brake. checks itself. A momentary motor or
N (Neutral), do the following: clicking noise might be heard while
7. Shift the transmission to the this test is going on, and it might
1. Set the parking brake and apply desired position.
the regular brake pedal. even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in P (Park). Use
1 (First) for vehicles with a
manual transmission.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑16.
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard. ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help The parking brake pedal is located
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best to the left of the brake pedal, near
on wheel speed and controls braking. the driver door.
braking pressure accordingly.
To set the parking brake, hold the
Remember: ABS does not change brake pedal down, then push the
the time needed to get a foot up to parking brake pedal down to its
the brake pedal or always decrease fully-applied position.
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
A chime will activate and the brake located above the parking brake Brake Assist
warning light, located on the pedal, with the parking brake
instrument panel, will flash when the symbol, directly rearward to release This vehicle has a brake assist
parking brake is applied and the the parking brake. feature designed to assist the driver
vehicle is moving at least 5 km/h in stopping or decreasing vehicle
If the ignition is on when the parking speed in emergency driving
(3 mph) for at least three seconds. brake is released, the brake system
The chime will deactivate and the conditions. This feature uses the
warning light will go off. stability system hydraulic brake
light will turn off when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is Notice: Driving with the parking control module to supplement the
moving below 5 km/h (3 mph). See brake on can overheat the brake power brake system under
Brake System Warning Light on system and cause premature conditions where the driver has
page 5‑15. wear or damage to brake system quickly and forcefully applied the
parts. Make sure that the parking brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
brake is fully released and the stop or slow down the vehicle. The
brake warning light is off before stability system hydraulic brake
driving. control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
If you are towing a trailer and are
vehicle until the ABS activates.
parking on any hill, see Driving
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
pedal movement during this time is
page 9‑58.
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
To release the parking brake, hold pedal pressure is quickly
the regular brake pedal down. Pull decreased.
the bottom edge of the lever,
Ride Control Systems The repairs would not be covered The message TRACTION FAULT
by the vehicle warranty. Reduce appears in the Driver Information
engine power and do not spin the Center (DIC) when a TCS or
Traction Control wheel(s) excessively while these Antilock Brake System (ABS)
System (TCS) lights and messages are problem has been detected and the
displayed. vehicle needs service. When this
The Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS can operate on dry roads message is on, the system will not
is part of StabiliTrak. TCS limits
under some conditions. When this limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
wheel slip which is especially useful
happens, the system may be accordingly. See Ride Control
in slippery road conditions. The
heard working or a reduction in System Messages on page 5‑26.
system operates only if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning acceleration may be noticed. This is
or beginning to lose traction. When normal and does not mean there is
this happens, TCS applies the a problem with the vehicle.
brakes to limit wheel spin and also Examples of these conditions
reduces engine power. The system include hard acceleration in a turn,
may be heard or felt while it is an abrupt upshift or downshift of the
working. This is normal and does transmission or driving on rough
not mean there is a problem with roads. The TCS/StabiliTrak light will flash
the vehicle. on the instrument panel cluster
If cruise control is being used when
when the TCS system or StabiliTrak
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle TCS begins to limit wheel spin,
is both on and activated.
is allowed to spin excessively the cruise control automatically
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake disengages. The cruise control
warning lights, and any relevant can be re-engaged when road
DIC messages are displayed, the conditions allow. See Cruise Control
transfer case could be damaged. on page 9‑50.
StabiliTrak® System In some cases, it may take

approximately two miles of driving
The vehicle has an electronic before the system initializes.
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced If cruise control is being used when
computer controlled system that StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
assists the driver with directional control automatically disengages.
The TCS/StabiliTrak button is control of the vehicle in difficult The cruise control can be
located on the instrument panel. driving conditions. re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
StabiliTrak activates when the page 9‑50.
computer senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the If there is a problem detected with
direction the vehicle is actually StabiliTrak, a SERVICE STAB SYS
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively message displays on the Driver
applies braking pressure at any one Information Center (DIC). See Ride
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the Control System Messages on
To turn off TCS, press and release page 5‑26 for more information.
driver with keeping the vehicle on
the TCS/StabiliTrak button. The When this message is displayed,
the intended path.
StabiliTrak Off light comes on in the the system is not working. Adjust
instrument panel cluster, and TRAC When the vehicle is started and your driving accordingly.
OFF comes on the DIC. To turn begins to move, the system
TCS back on, press and release the performs several diagnostic checks StabiliTrak and Traction Control
TCS/StabiliTrak button. to insure there are no problems. (TCS) come on automatically
The system may be heard or felt whenever the vehicle is started and
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer the systems are reset with each
while it is working. This is normal
accessories can affect the vehicle ignition cycle. However, when the
and does not mean there is a
performance. See Accessories and transfer case is placed in
problem with the vehicle. The
Modifications on page 10‑4. Four-Wheel-Low mode, StabiliTrak
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). is automatically disabled.
See Four-Wheel Drive on

It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the TCS portion of the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in The TCS/StabiliTrak light will flash To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,
sand, mud, ice, or snow, and it is on the instrument panel cluster press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak
necessary to “rock” the vehicle to when the TCS system or StabiliTrak button until the TRAC OFF and
attempt to free it. If traction control is both on and activated. STAB SYS OFF messages come on
is turned off, only the brake-traction the DIC and the StabiliTrak Off light
control portion of traction control comes on the instrument panel. To
will work. The engine speed turn TCS and StabiliTrak back on,
management will be disabled. In this press and release the TCS/
mode, engine power is not reduced StabiliTrak button.
automatically and the drive wheels
can spin more freely. This can When the TCS or StabiliTrak system
cause the brake-traction control to is turned off, the StabiliTrak Off light
activate constantly. See If the The TCS/StabiliTrak button is and the appropriate TRAC OFF or
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑17. located on the instrument panel. STAB SYS OFF message will be
displayed on the DIC. The vehicle
will still have brake-traction control
when TCS or StabiliTrak is off, but
will not be able to use the engine
speed management system. The
TCS/StabiliTrak light flashes when
either system is actively working.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
Limited-Slip Rear Axle Cruise Control If the vehicle's StabiliTrak® /Traction

Control System (TCS) begins to
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle With cruise control, a speed of limit wheel spin while the cruise
can give more traction on snow, about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can control is on, the cruise control
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works be maintained without keeping your automatically disengages. See
like a standard axle most of the foot on the accelerator. Cruise StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑48 or
time, but when traction is low, this control does not work at speeds Traction Control System (TCS) on
feature allows the drive wheel with below about 40 km/h (25 mph). page 9‑47. When road conditions
the most traction to move the allow you to safely use it again, the
vehicle. If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control shuts off. cruise control can be turned
back on.
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
These controls are located at the
Cruise control can be dangerous
end of the multifunction lever.
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can 9 (Off): Turns the system off.
cause excessive wheel slip, and R (On): Turns the system on.
you could lose control. Do not use
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to
cruise control on slippery roads.
make the vehicle accelerate or
resume a previously set speed.
r T (Set): Press the button at If the lever is held at resume/

the end of the lever to set the accelerate the vehicle keeps going
speed. faster until the lever is released or
the brake is applied. Do not hold the
Setting Cruise Control lever at resume/accelerate, unless
If the cruise button is on when not in you want the vehicle to go faster.
use, it could get bumped and go into This light on the instrument panel Increasing Speed While Using
cruise when not desired. Keep the cluster comes on while the cruise Cruise Control
cruise control switch off when cruise control is on.
is not being used. If the cruise control system is
Resuming a Set Speed already activated,
1. Move the cruise control lever to R.
If the cruise control is set at a . Use the accelerator pedal to get
2. Get up to the speed desired. desired speed and then the brakes to the higher speed. Press
are applied, the cruise control is r T at the end of the lever,
3. Press r T at the end of the disengaged without erasing the set then release the button and
lever and release it. speed from memory. the accelerator pedal. If the
4. Take your foot off the accelerator Once the vehicle speed reaches accelerator pedal is held longer
pedal. about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, than 60 seconds, cruise control
move the cruise control lever briefly will turn off.
from R to S . The vehicle returns to . Move the cruise lever from R to
the previous set speed and stays S . Hold it until the desired
there. speed is reached, and then
release the lever.
. To increase the vehicle speed in
small amounts, move the lever
briefly to S .
Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control How well the cruise control works There are two ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is on hills depends upon the vehicle control:
already activated, speed, load, and the steepness of . To disengage cruise control;
the hills. When going up steep hills,
. Press and hold r T until the you might have to step on the
step lightly on the brake pedal or
lower speed desired is reached, lightly tap or press the clutch, for
accelerator pedal to maintain the manual transmissions.
then release it. vehicle speed. When going
. To slow down in small amounts, downhill, you might have to brake or . To turn off the cruise control,
shift to a lower gear to keep the move the cruise control lever
briefly press r T .
vehicle speed down. When the to 9 .
Passing Another Vehicle While brakes are applied the cruise control
Using Cruise Control is disengaged. Erasing Speed Memory
Use the accelerator pedal to The cruise control set speed is
increase the vehicle speed. When erased from memory by moving the
you take your foot off the pedal, the cruise control lever to 9 or if the
vehicle will slow down to the vehicle is turned off.
previous set cruise control speed.
Fuel Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel is (U.S. and Canada Only)
an important part of the proper At a minimum, gasoline should
maintenance of this vehicle. To help meet ASTM specification D 4814 in
keep the engine clean and maintain the United States or CAN/
optimum vehicle performance, we CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
recommend the use of gasoline Some gasolines contain an
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent octane-enhancing additive called
Gasoline. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Look for the TOP TIER label on the tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets against the use of gasolines
enhanced detergency standards containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel on page 9‑54 for additional
of marketers providing TOP TIER information.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
www.toptiergas.com. higher. If the octane rating is less California Fuel
than 87, an audible knocking noise, Requirements
commonly referred to as spark
If the vehicle is certified to meet
knock, might be heard when driving.
California Emissions Standards, it is
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
designed to operate on fuels that
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
meet California specifications. See
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
the underhood emission control
when using gasoline rated at
label. If this fuel is not available in
87 octane or higher, the engine
states adopting California Emissions
needs service.
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP
be affected. The malfunction TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
indicator lamp could turn on and the To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can
page 5‑13. If this occurs, return to help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
If it is determined that the condition emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only
is caused by the type of fuel used, properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by
repairs might not be covered by the should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
vehicle warranty. However, some gasolines contain your dealer.
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates,
Fuels in Foreign Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and
Countries regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be
injectors and intake valves clean available in your area. We
Never use leaded gasoline or any
and avoid problems due to dirty recommend that you use these
other fuel not recommended in the
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier.
caused by use of improper fuel
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
would not be covered by the vehicle
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than
warranty.
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in
To check the fuel availability, ask an detergency standards developed by vehicles that were not designed for
auto club, or contact a major oil the auto companies. A list of those fuels.
company that does business in the marketers providing TOP TIER
country where you will be driving. Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Notice: This vehicle was not Filling the Tank

designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can { WARNING
corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuel vapor burns violently and a
system and also damage plastic
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
and rubber parts. That damage
To help avoid injuries to you and
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty. others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
Some gasolines that are island. Turn off the engine when
not reformulated for low refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
emissions can contain an or when refueling the vehicle. Do
octane-enhancing additive called not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is located
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese sparks, flames, and smoking behind a hinged fuel door on the
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant driver side of the vehicle.
materials away from fuel. Do not
where you buy gasoline whether the
leave the fuel pump unattended To remove the fuel cap, turn it
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. when refueling the vehicle. This is slowly counterclockwise.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce against the law in some places. While refueling, hang the tethered
spark plug life and affect emission Do not re-enter the vehicle while fuel cap from the hook on the
control system performance. The pumping fuel. Keep children away fuel door.
malfunction indicator lamp might from the fuel pump; never let
turn on. If this occurs, return to your children pump fuel.
dealer for service.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it

{ WARNING clockwise until it clicks. Make sure { WARNING
the cap is fully installed. The
Fuel can spray out on you if you diagnostic system can determine if If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. the fuel cap has been left off or refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then improperly installed. This would nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
something ignites it, you could be allow fuel to evaporate into the shutting off the pump or by
badly burned. This spray can atmosphere. If the fuel cap is not notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, properly installed, the FUEL CAP Leave the area immediately.
and is more likely in hot weather. message appears on the Driver
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Information Center (DIC) and the Notice: If a new fuel cap is
for any hiss noise to stop. Then check engine light will be lit on the needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. instrument panel cluster. See Fuel type of cap from your dealer. The
System Messages on page 5‑25 wrong type of fuel cap might not
and Malfunction Indicator Lamp on fit properly, might cause the
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not page 5‑13 for more information.
top off or overfill the tank and wait a malfunction indicator lamp to
few seconds after you have finished light, and could damage the fuel
pumping before removing the tank and emissions system. See
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
surfaces as soon as possible. See page 5‑13.
Exterior Care on page 10‑96.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Information
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
and the vehicle damaged if this See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to
the ground. tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled

. Consider using a sway control. Three important considerations
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on See “Hitches” in Towing have to do with weight:
page 10‑91. For information on Equipment on page 9‑66. . The weight of the trailer
towing the vehicle behind another . Do not tow a trailer at all during
vehicle such as a motor home, see the first 800 km (500 miles) the
. The weight of the trailer tongue
Recreational Vehicle Towing on new vehicle is driven. The . The weight on the vehicle's tires
page 10‑91. engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged. Driving with a Trailer
Driving Characteristics . Then, during the first 800 km
and Towing Tips (500 miles) that a trailer is { WARNING
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h When towing a trailer, exhaust
Pulling A Trailer (50 mph) and do not make starts
gases may collect at the rear of
Here are some important points: at full throttle. This helps the
the vehicle and enter if the
. There are many different laws, engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
including speed limit restrictions, window is open.
having to do with trailering. loads.
Make sure the rig will be legal, . Vehicles with automatic Engine exhaust contains Carbon
not only where you live but also transmissions can tow in Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
where you will be driving. D (Drive), but you may want to seen or smelled. It can cause
A good source for this shift to a lower gear selection if unconsciousness and even death.
information can be state or the transmission shifts too often (Continued)
provincial police. (e.g., under heavy loads and/or
hilly conditions). If the vehicle
has a manual transmission it is
better not to use the
highest gear.
Towing a trailer requires a certain While towing a trailer or when

WARNING (Continued) amount of experience. Get to know exposed to long periods of
the rig before setting out for the sunshine, the floor of the truck bed
To maximize safety when towing open road. Get acquainted with the may become very warm. Avoid
a trailer: feel of handling and braking with the putting items in the truck bed that
. Have the exhaust system added weight of the trailer. And might be affected by high ambient
inspected for leaks and make always keep in mind that the vehicle temperatures.
necessary repairs before you are driving is now longer and
starting a trip. not as responsive as the vehicle is Following Distance
. by itself. Stay at least twice as far behind the
Never drive with the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most Before starting, check all trailer hitch vehicle ahead as you would when
window open. parts and attachments, safety driving the vehicle without a trailer.
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, This can help to avoid situations
. Fully open the air outlets on that require heavy braking and
tires and mirror adjustments. If the
or under the instrument sudden turns.
trailer has electric brakes, start the
panel.
vehicle and trailer moving and then Passing
. Adjust the Climate Control apply the trailer brake controller by
system to a setting that hand to be sure the brakes are More passing distance is needed
brings in only outside air and working. This checks the electrical when towing a trailer. Because the
set the fan speed to the connection at the same time. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
highest setting. See Climate much farther beyond the passed
During the trip, check occasionally vehicle before returning to the lane.
Control System in the Index.
to be sure that the load is secure,
For more information about and that the lamps and any trailer
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine brakes are still working.
Exhaust on page 9‑34.
Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Vehicles with automatic

Trailer transmissions can tow in D (Drive),
Hold the bottom of the steering
but you may want to shift to a lower
wheel with one hand. Then, to move The arrows on the instrument panel gear selection if the transmission
the trailer to the left, move that hand flash whenever signaling a turn or shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
to the left. To move the trailer to the lane change. Properly hooked up, loads and/or hilly conditions). If the
right, move your hand to the right. the trailer lamps also flash, telling vehicle has a manual transmission it
Always back up slowly and, other drivers the vehicle is turning, is better not to use the highest gear.
if possible, have someone changing lanes or stopping.
guide you. When towing at high altitude on
When towing a trailer, the arrows on steep uphill grades, consider the
Making Turns the instrument panel flash for turns following: Engine coolant will boil at
even if the bulbs on the trailer are a lower temperature than at normal
Notice: Making very sharp turns burned out. For this reason you may
while trailering could cause the altitudes. If the engine is turned off
think other drivers are seeing the immediately after towing at high
trailer to come in contact with the signal when they are not. It is
vehicle. The vehicle could be altitude on steep uphill grades, the
important to check occasionally to vehicle may show signs similar to
damaged. Avoid making very be sure the trailer bulbs are still
sharp turns while trailering. engine overheating. To avoid this,
working. let the engine run while parked,
When turning with a trailer, make preferably on level ground, with an
wider turns than normal. Do this so Driving On Grades
automatic transmission in P (Park)
the trailer will not strike soft Reduce speed and shift to a or a manual transmission in
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees lower gear before starting down a N (Neutral) with the parking brake
or other objects. Avoid jerky or long or steep downgrade. If the applied, for a few minutes before
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in transmission is not shifted down, the turning the engine off. If the
advance. brakes might have to be used so overheat warning comes on, see
much that they would get hot and no Engine Overheating on page 10‑23.
longer work well.
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
place, release the brake pedal clear of the chocks.
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Stop and have someone pick up
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then and store the chocks.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift
the trailer attached can be into P (Park) for vehicles with an Maintenance When Trailer
dangerous. If something goes automatic transmission or into Towing
wrong, the rig could start to move. gear for vehicles with a manual The vehicle needs service more
People can be injured, and both transmission. often when pulling a trailer. See
the vehicle and the trailer can be 5. If the vehicle has Maintenance Schedule on
damaged. When possible, always four-wheel-drive, be sure the page 11‑3 or the Index for more
park the rig on a flat surface. transfer case is in a drive gear information. Things that are
and not in N (Neutral). See especially important in trailer
If parking the rig on a hill: Four-Wheel Drive on page 10‑30 operation are automatic
for more information. transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
1. Press the brake pedal, but do lubricant, belts, cooling system and
not shift into P (Park) yet for 6. Release the brake pedal. brake system. It is a good idea to
vehicles with an automatic Leaving After Parking on a Hill inspect these before and during
transmission, or into gear for the trip.
vehicles with a manual 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
transmission. Turn the wheels while you: Check periodically to see that all
into the curb if facing downhill or hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
. Start the engine
into traffic if facing uphill.
. Shift into a gear
2. Have someone place chocks
. Release the parking brake
under the trailer wheels.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
Trailer Towing To pull a trailer correctly, follow Weight of the Trailer

the advice in this section and see
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
your dealer for important
{ WARNING information about towing a trailer It depends on how the rig is used.
with the vehicle. For example, speed, altitude, road
The driver can lose control when
grades, outside temperature and
pulling a trailer if the correct To identify the trailering capacity of
how much the vehicle is used to pull
equipment is not used or the the vehicle, read the information in
a trailer are all important. It can
vehicle is not driven properly. For “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
depend on any special equipment
example, if the trailer is too later in this section.
on the vehicle, and the amount of
heavy, the brakes may not work Trailering is different than just tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
well — or even at all. The driver driving the vehicle by itself. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
and passengers could be Trailering means changes in later in this section for more
seriously injured. The vehicle may handling, acceleration, braking, information.
also be damaged; the resulting durability and fuel economy.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
repairs would not be covered by Successful, safe trailering takes
assuming only the driver is in the
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer correct equipment, and it has to be
tow vehicle and it has all the
only if all the steps in this section used properly.
required trailering equipment. The
have been followed. Ask your The following information has many weight of additional optional
dealer for advice and information time-tested, important trailering tips equipment, passengers and cargo in
about towing a trailer with the and safety rules. Many of these are the tow vehicle must be subtracted
vehicle. important for your safety and that of from the maximum trailer weight.
your passengers. So please read
Use the following chart to determine
Notice: Pulling a trailer this section carefully before pulling a
how much the vehicle can weigh,
improperly can damage the trailer.
based upon the vehicle model and
vehicle and result in costly options.
repairs not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

2WD Regular Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission 3.73 1 542 kg (3,400 lbs) 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs)
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 1 089 kg (2,400 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)
2WD Extended Cab
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 998 kg (2,200 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)
3.42
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)
3.73
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,
3.42 1 814 kg (4,000 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)
ZQ8 Sport Suspension
2WD Crew Cab
3.42
3.73
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,
3.42 1 724 kg (3,800 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)
ZQ8 Sport Suspension
4WD Regular Cab
4WD Extended Cab
3.42
4.10
4WD Crew Cab
3.42
4.10
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19 After loading the trailer, weigh the
information or advice, or write us at for more information about the trailer and then the tongue,
our Customer Assistance Offices. vehicle's maximum load capacity. separately, to see if the weights are
See Customer Assistance Offices proper. If they are not, adjustments
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or might be made by moving some
Customer Assistance Offices items around in the trailer.
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more Trailering may be limited by the
information. vehicle's ability to carry tongue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
an important weight to measure the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
because it affects the total gross Weight Rating). The effect of
weight of the vehicle. The Gross additional weight may reduce the
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the trailering capacity more than the
curb weight of the vehicle, any total of the additional weight.
cargo carried in it, and the people
The trailer tongue weight (A) should It is important that the vehicle
who will be riding in the vehicle.
be 10 percent to 15 percent of the does not exceed any of its
If there are a lot of options,
total loaded trailer weight, up to a ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
maximum of 226 kg (500 lbs) with a Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight carrying hitch. Weight. The only way to be sure it is
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the Do not exceed the maximum not exceeding any of these ratings
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, allowable tongue weight for the is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
the tongue load must be added to vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
the GVW because the vehicle will extension that will position the hitch
be carrying that weight, too. See ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer
tongue weight on the rear axle.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Weight-Distributing Hitches follow the trailer or hitch
Tires and Weight Carrying Hitches manufacturer's recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always
Be sure the vehicle's tires are A step bumper hitch can be used for leave just enough slack so the rig
inflated to the upper limit for cold trailers up to 907 kg (2,000 lbs) total can turn. Never allow safety chains
tires. These numbers can be found weight, and 90 kg (200 lbs) tongue to drag on the ground.
on the Certification/Tire label weight.
located at the bottom of the center Notice: If a step-bumper hitch is Trailer Brakes
pillar on the driver's side of the used, the bumper could be A loaded trailer that weighs more
vehicle, or see Vehicle Load Limits damaged in sharp turns. Make than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
on page 9‑19. Make sure not to go sure there is ample room when have its own brake system that is
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, turning to avoid contact between adequate for the weight of the
or the GAWR, including the weight the trailer and the bumper. trailer. Be sure to read and follow
of the trailer tongue. If using a
the instructions for the trailer brakes
weight distributing hitch, make sure Safety Chains so they are installed, adjusted and
not to go over the rear axle limit
Always attach chains between the maintained properly.
before applying the weight
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the Since the vehicle is equipped with
distribution spring bars.
safety chains under the tongue of StabiliTrak®, the trailer cannot tap
the trailer to help prevent the tongue into the vehicle's hydraulic brake
Towing Equipment from contacting the road if it system.
Hitches becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains
It is important to have the correct may be provided by the hitch
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large manufacturer or by the trailer
trucks going by and rough roads are manufacturer. For trailers up to
a few reasons why the right hitch is 907 kg (2,000 lbs) safety chains may
needed. be attached to the attaching points
on the bumper. For heavier trailers,
Trailer Wiring Harness Conversions and Pickup Conversion to

The vehicle may be equipped with a Add-Ons Chassis Cab
four‐pin trailer towing harness. This
We are aware that some vehicle
harness has a four‐pin trailer
connector that is attached to a Add-On Electrical owners might consider having the
pickup box removed and a
bracket on the hitch platform. The Equipment commercial or recreational body
four‐wire harness contains the
Notice: Do not add anything installed. However, we recommend
following trailer circuits:
electrical to the vehicle unless that conversions of this type not be
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal you check with your dealer first. done to pickups. Owners should be
. Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal Some electrical equipment can aware that, as manufactured, there
damage the vehicle and the are differences between a chassis
. Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps damage would not be covered by cab and a pickup with the box
. White: Ground the vehicle's warranty. Some removed which could affect vehicle
add-on electrical equipment can safety.
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑32 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑33.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-23 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
General Information Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
California Proposition Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Center High-Mounted
California Perchlorate Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-38
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-39
Accessories and Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Vehicle Checks Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Electrical System
Doing Your Own Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-32 Electrical System
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Automatic Transmission Shift Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Lock Control Function Fuses and Circuit
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Park Brake and P (Park) Wheels and Tires
Automatic Transmission Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Wiper Blade
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-48
Manual Transmission Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Headlamp Aiming Tire Terminology and
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Jump Starting General Information

Tire Pressure for High-Speed Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing your dealer. You will receive
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-91 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Appearance Care
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
When It Is Time for New
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-85
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-86
Vehicle Care 10-3
Genuine GM parts have one of California Proposition California Perchlorate

these marks:
65 Warning Materials Requirements
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag
known to the State of California to initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials.
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary.
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Accessories and Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks

resulting from modifications or the
Modifications installation or use of non‐GM
Adding non‐dealer accessories or certified parts, including control Doing Your Own
making modifications to the vehicle module or software modifications, is Service Work
can affect vehicle performance and not covered under the terms of the
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
{ WARNING
handling, emissions systems, affected parts. It can be dangerous to work on
aerodynamics, durability, and GM Accessories are designed to your vehicle if you do not have
electronic systems like antilock complement and function with other the proper knowledge, service
brakes, traction control, and stability systems on the vehicle. See your manual, tools, or parts. Always
control. These accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle follow owner manual procedures
modifications could even cause using genuine GM Accessories and consult the service manual
malfunction or damage not covered installed by a dealer technician. for your vehicle before doing any
by the vehicle warranty. service work.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑33. If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑18.
Vehicle Care 10-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood 2. Release the secondary latch on
Before attempting to do your own the hood. It is located below the
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood, do the following: front center of the hood.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on 3. Lift the hood.
page 3‑32.
4. Release the hood prop from its
Keep a record with all parts receipts retainer and put the hood prop
and list the mileage and the date of into the slot in the hood.
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on Before closing the hood, be sure all
page 11‑16. the filler caps are on properly. Then
1. Pull the handle with this symbol
lift the hood to relieve pressure on
on it. It is located inside the
the hood prop. Remove the hood
vehicle on the lower left side of
prop from the slot in the hood and
the instrument panel.
return the prop to its retainer. Lower
the hood 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 in)
above the vehicle and release it to
latch fully. Check to make sure the
hood is closed and repeat the
procedure if necessary.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
3.7 L L5 Engine Shown (2.9 L L4 Engine Similar)

Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
“Adding Washer Fluid” under to Add Engine Oil” under See Jump Starting on
Washer Fluid on page 10‑26. Engine Oil on page 10‑10. page 10‑87.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
See Engine Coolant on Cooling System on page 10‑18. Brake Fluid on page 10‑28.
page 10‑19. H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal L. Engine Compartment Fuse
C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on (GND). See Jump Starting on Block on page 10‑41.
page 10‑17. page 10‑87. M. Battery on page 10‑30.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(low in engine compartment). “Checking Engine Oil” under (If Equipped). See Hydraulic
See Power Steering Fluid on Engine Oil on page 10‑10. Clutch on page 10‑17.
page 10‑25.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (If Equipped). See
“Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑13.
10-8 Vehicle Care
5.3 L V8 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Automatic Transmission Fluid H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
page 10‑17. Dipstick (If Equipped). See Brake Fluid on page 10‑28.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator “Checking the Fluid Level” I. Battery on page 10‑30.
(If Equipped). See Engine Air under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑13. J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑17. See Power Steering Fluid on
C. Windshield Washer Fluid F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See page 10‑25.
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer “Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑10. K. Engine Compartment Fuse
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Block on page 10‑41.
page 10‑26. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under L. Radiator Pressure Cap. See
D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. Cooling System on page 10‑18.
See Engine Coolant on Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
page 10‑19.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil

To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
your investment: loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the L4 and L5 Engines
. Always use engine oil approved location of the engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. V8 Engine
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not If the oil is below the cross-hatched
Engine Oil” in this section. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
provide an accurate oil level
. Change the engine oil at the reading. 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
appropriate time. See Engine Oil and then recheck the level. See
Life System on page 10‑12. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
with a paper towel or cloth, then this section for an explanation of
. Always dispose of engine oil push it back in all the way.
properly. See “What to Do with what kind of oil to use. For engine
Remove it again, keeping the tip oil crankcase capacity, see
Used Oil” in this section. down, and check the level. Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Notice: Do not add too much oil. Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Oil levels above or below the
Selecting the right engine oil
acceptable operating range
depends on both the proper oil
shown on the dipstick are harmful
specification and viscosity grade.
to the engine. If you find that you
See Recommended Fluids and
have an oil level above the
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
operating range, i.e., the engine Notice: Failure to use the
has so much oil that the oil level Specification recommended engine oil or
gets above the cross-hatched equivalent can result in engine
Use and ask for licensed engine oils
area that shows the proper damage not covered by the
with the dexos1™ approved
operating range, the engine could vehicle warranty. Check with your
certification mark. Engine oils
be damaged. You should drain dealer or service provider on
meeting the requirements for the
out the excess oil or limit driving whether the oil is approved to the
vehicle should have the dexos1
of the vehicle and seek a service dexos1 specification.
approved certification mark. This
professional to remove the
certification mark indicates that the Viscosity Grade
excess amount of oil.
oil has been approved to the dexos1
See Engine Compartment Overview specification. SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity
on page 10‑6 for the location of the grade for the vehicle. Do not use
engine oil fill cap. other viscosity grade oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating If in an area of extreme cold, where
range. Push the dipstick all the way the temperature falls below −20°F
back in when through. (−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
10-12 Vehicle Care
grade, always select an oil that containing used engine oil. See the When the system has calculated
meets the dexos1 specification or manufacturer's warnings about the that oil life has been diminished, it
equivalent. See “Specification” for use and disposal of oil products. indicates that an oil change is
more information. Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE OIL
environment. If you change your message comes on. See Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Messages on page 5‑24. Change
Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never the oil as soon as possible within
Do not add anything to the oil. The dispose of oil by putting it in the the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
recommended oils with the dexos trash or pouring it on the ground, possible that, if driving under the
specification and displaying the into sewers, or into streams or best conditions, the oil life system
dexos certification mark are all that bodies of water. Recycle it by taking might indicate that an oil change is
is needed for good performance and it to a place that collects used oil. not necessary for up to a year. The
engine protection. engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System at this time, the system must be
recommended and could cause reset. Your dealer has trained
engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil
people who will perform this work
vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer system and reset the system. It is also
that indicates when to change the important to check the oil regularly
What to Do with Used Oil engine oil and filter. This is based over the course of an oil drain
Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which interval and keep it at the proper
elements that can be unhealthy for include engine revolutions, engine level.
your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven.
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the If the system is ever reset
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be
skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly, since the last oil change.
properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time Remember to reset the oil life
the oil is changed. system whenever the oil is changed.
Vehicle Care 10-13
How to Reset the Engine Oil Automatic Transmission Notice: Too much or too little
Life System fluid can damage the
Fluid transmission. Too much can
Reset the system whenever the mean that some of the fluid could
engine oil is changed so that the When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid come out and fall on hot engine
system can calculate the next parts or exhaust system parts,
engine oil change. To reset the A good time to check the automatic starting a fire. Too little fluid
system: transmission fluid level is when the could cause the transmission to
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, engine oil is changed. overheat. Be sure to get an
with the engine off . Change the fluid and filter at the accurate reading if checking the
intervals listed in Maintenance transmission fluid.
2. Press and release the stem in
the lower center of the Schedule on page 11‑3, and be sure Wait at least 30 minutes before
instrument cluster until the OIL to use the transmission fluid listed in checking the transmission fluid level
LIFE message is displayed. Recommended Fluids and if the vehicle has been driven:
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE . When outside temperatures are
and RESET messages appear, How to Check Automatic above 32°C (90°F).
press and hold the stem until Transmission Fluid . At high speed for quite a while.
several beeps sound. This
Because this operation can be a . In heavy traffic — especially in
confirms that the oil life system
little difficult, it may be decided to hot weather.
has been reset.
have this done at the dealer service
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. department.
. While pulling a trailer.
If the CHANGE OIL message If not taken to the dealer, be sure to To get the right reading, the fluid
comes back on when the vehicle is follow all the instructions here, or a should be at normal operating
started, the engine oil life system false reading on the dipstick could temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
has not been reset. Repeat the result. (180°F to 200°F).
procedure.
10-14 Vehicle Care
Get the vehicle warmed up by Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the
driving about 24 km (15 mi) when To prepare the vehicle: engine:
outside temperatures are above 1. Flip the handle up and then pull
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C 1. Park the vehicle on a level
place. Keep the engine running. out the dipstick and wipe it with
(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third) a clean rag or paper towel.
until the engine temperature gauge 2. With the parking brake applied,
moves and then remains steady for place the shift lever in P (Park).
10 minutes.
3. With foot on the brake pedal,
A cold fluid check can be made move the shift lever through
after the vehicle has been sitting for each gear range, pausing for
eight hours or more with the engine about three seconds in each
off, but this is used only as a range. Then, position the shift
reference. Let the engine run at idle lever in P (Park). The automatic transmission
for five minutes if outside dipstick handle with this symbol
temperatures are 10°C (50°F) or 4. Let the engine run at idle for
three minutes or more. on it is located in the engine
more. If it is colder than 10°C compartment on the passenger
(50°F), the engine may have to idle side of the vehicle.
longer. Should the fluid level be low
during this cold check, check the See Engine Compartment
fluid hot before adding fluid. Overview on page 10‑6 for more
Checking the fluid hot gives a more information on location.
accurate reading of the fluid level. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds, and pull it back
out again.
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Add Automatic Notice: Use of the incorrect

Transmission Fluid automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule damages may not be covered by
to determine what kind of the vehicle warranty. Always use
transmission fluid to use. See the automatic transmission fluid
Recommended Fluids and listed in Recommended Fluids
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, Lubricants on page 11‑12. and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
and read the lower level. The Add fluid only after checking the
fluid level must be in the COLD . After adding fluid, recheck the
transmission fluid while it is hot. fluid level as described under
area, below the cross-hatched A cold check is used only as a
area, for a cold check or in the “How to Check Automatic
reference. If the fluid level is low, Transmission Fluid,” earlier in
HOT or cross-hatched area for a add only enough of the proper fluid
hot check. Be sure to keep the this section.
to bring the level up to the HOT area
dipstick pointed down to get an for a hot check. It does not take . When the correct fluid level is
accurate reading. much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L obtained, push the dipstick back
4. If the fluid level is in the (1 pt). Do not overfill. in all the way; then flip the
acceptable range, push the handle down to lock the dipstick
dipstick back in all the way; then in place.
flip the handle down to lock the
dipstick in place.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Manual Transmission Check the fluid level only when 3. If the fluid level is good, install
the engine is off, the vehicle is the plug and be sure it is fully
Fluid parked on a level place and the seated. If the fluid level is low,
When to Check transmission is cool enough to add more fluid as described in
touch the transmission case. the next steps.
A good time to check the manual
transmission fluid is when the After this is done: How to Add Fluid
engine oil is changed. However, the Here is how to add fluid. Refer to
fluid in the manual transmission the Maintenance Schedule to
does not require changing. determine what kind of fluid to use.
How to Check See Recommended Fluids and
Because this operation can be a
little difficult, it may be decided to 1. Remove the fill plug.
have this done at the dealer service 2. Add fluid at the fill plug hole.
department. Add only enough fluid to bring
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to the fluid level up to the bottom of
follow all the instructions here, or a the fill plug hole.
false reading on the dipstick could 3. Install the fill plug. Be sure the
result. plug is fully seated.
1. Remove the fill plug.
Notice: Too much or too
2. Check that the lubricant level is
little fluid can damage the
up to the bottom of the fill
transmission. Too little fluid could
plug hole.
cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-17
Hydraulic Clutch When to Check and What Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

to Use
The hydraulic clutch linkage in the
vehicle is self-adjusting. The clutch
master cylinder reservoir is filled
with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir

cap has this symbol on it. See
Engine Compartment Overview on The engine air cleaner/filter is
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule located in the engine compartment
to determine how often to check the on the passenger side of the
It is not necessary to regularly fluid level in the clutch master vehicle. See Engine Compartment
check clutch fluid unless a leak in cylinder reservoir and for the proper Overview on page 10‑6 for more
the system is suspected. Adding fluid. See Recommended Fluids and information on location.
fluid will not correct a leak. Lubricants on page 11‑12.
A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the
How to Check and Add Fluid
system inspected and repaired. The proper fluid should be added if
the level does not reach the bottom
of the diaphragm when it is in place
in the reservoir. See the instructions
on the reservoir cap.
10-18 Vehicle Care
When to Inspect the Engine Air 4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/ Cooling System
Cleaner/Filter filter cover. Fasten the clips to
hold the cover in place. The cooling system allows the
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the engine to maintain the correct
scheduled maintenance intervals working temperature.
and replace it at the first oil change { WARNING
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
Operating the engine with the air
interval. See Maintenance Schedule
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
If you are driving in dusty/dirty others to be burned. The air
conditions, inspect the filter at each cleaner not only cleans the air; it
engine oil change. helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
How to Inspect the Engine Air working on the engine and do not
Cleaner/Filter drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter, do the following: Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the off, dirt can easily get into the
2.9 L L4 Engine Shown
cover on and remove the cover. engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter (3.7 L L5 Engine Similar)
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/ in place when you are driving. A. Coolant Recovery Tank
filter.
B. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. of View)
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑15 to C. Radiator Pressure Cap
determine which filter to use.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Notice: Using coolant other than

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine
under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing
when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
and can cause injury. Keep or 24 months, whichever occurs
hands, clothing, and tools away first. Any repairs would not be
from any underhood electric fan. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
5.3 L V8 Engine
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle is
B. Radiator Pressure Cap hot. Do not touch them. If you do, filled with DEX-COOL® engine
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out you can be burned. coolant. This coolant is designed to
of View) Do not run the engine if there is a remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
leak. If you run the engine, it
occurs first.
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling
could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add
fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑23.
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or
drinkable water and DEX-COOL additives are used in the vehicle
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: mixture of the engine coolant
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down listed in this manual for the
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside cooling system. See
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 11‑12 for
. Gives boiling protection up to more information.
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Never dispose of engine coolant by
With plain water or the wrong putting it in the trash, pouring it on
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and the ground, or into sewers, streams,
hot but you would not get the corrosion. or bodies of water. Have the coolant
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. changed by an authorized service
could catch fire and you or center, familiar with legal
. Helps keep the proper engine requirements regarding used
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
mixture is used, the engine could health.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Checking Coolant Check to see if coolant is visible in How to Add Coolant to the
the coolant recovery tank. If the Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level
coolant inside the coolant recovery
surface when checking the coolant
tank is boiling, do not do anything
level.
else until it cools down. If coolant is
{ WARNING
visible but the coolant level is not at You can be burned if you spill
or above the FULL COLD mark, add coolant on hot engine parts.
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Coolant contains ethylene glycol
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
and it will burn if the engine parts
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
are hot enough. Do not spill
the cooling system is cool before
coolant on a hot engine.
this is done.
The coolant recovery tank cap has
The vehicle must be on a level
this symbol on it. Notice: This vehicle has a
surface. When the engine is cold,
It is located toward the rear of the the coolant level should be at FULL specific coolant fill procedure.
engine compartment on the COLD, or a little higher. When the Failure to follow this procedure
passenger side of the vehicle. See engine is warm, the level could be could cause the engine to
Engine Compartment Overview on above the FULL COLD level. overheat and be severely
page 10‑6 for more information on damaged.
When the engine is cold, the coolant
location. When the coolant in the coolant
level should be at least up to the
FULL COLD mark. If it is not, there recovery tank is at the FULL COLD
could be a leak in the cooling mark, start the vehicle.
system. If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant recovery tank.
10-22 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the 2. Keep turning the cap to

Radiator WARNING (Continued) remove it.
cooling system and surge tank 3. Fill the radiator with the proper
{ WARNING pressure cap to cool if you ever DEX‐COOL coolant mixture, up
have to turn the pressure cap. to the base of the filler neck.
An electric engine cooling fan See Engine Coolant on
under the hood can start up even page 10‑19 for more information
when the engine is not running If coolant is needed, add the proper about the proper coolant
and can cause injury. Keep mixture directly to the radiator, but mixture.
hands, clothing, and tools away be sure the cooling system is cool
from any underhood electric fan. before this is done.
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are 1. Remove the radiator pressure
under pressure, and if you turn cap when the cooling system,
the surge tank pressure including the upper radiator
cap — even a little — they can hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
come out at high speed. Never pressure cap slowly
turn the cap when the cooling 4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
counterclockwise about one
the FULL COLD mark.
system, including the surge tank full turn.
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the 5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
(Continued) recovery tank, but leave the
stop. A hiss means there is still
radiator pressure cap off.
some pressure left.
Vehicle Care 10-23
At any time during this procedure if If the decision is made to lift the
coolant begins to flow out of the hood, make sure the vehicle is
filler neck, reinstall the parked on a level surface.
pressure cap. Then check to see if the engine
Notice: If the pressure cap is not cooling fan is running. If the engine
tightly installed, coolant loss and is overheating, the fan should be
possible engine damage may running. If it is not, do not continue
occur. Be sure the cap is properly to run the engine and have the
and tightly secured. vehicle serviced.
The engine cooling fan speed
Engine Overheating should increase when idle speed is
The vehicle has a coolant doubled by pushing the accelerator
6. Start the engine and let it run pedal down. If it does not, the
temperature gauge displayed on the
until the upper radiator hose can vehicle needs service. Turn off the
instrument panel to warn if the
be felt getting hot. Watch out for engine.
engine is overheating. See Engine
the engine cooling fan.
Coolant Temperature Gauge on Notice: Engine damage from
7. By this time, the coolant level page 5‑9. If the engine is too hot, running the engine without
inside the radiator filler neck the air conditioning might stop coolant is not covered by the
might be lower. If the level is working. This is normal and helps warranty.
lower, add more of the proper cool the engine.
DEX‐COOL coolant mixture Notice: If the engine catches fire
If the decision is made not to lift the because of being driven with no
through the filler neck until the
hood when the warning appears, but coolant, the vehicle can be badly
level reaches the base of the
instead get service help right away. damaged. The costly repairs
filler neck.
See Roadside Assistance Program would not be covered by the
8. Replace the pressure cap. (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or vehicle warranty.
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
10-24 Vehicle Care
If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge is
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: no longer in the overheat zone
from the engine if you see or hear .
or an overheat warning no longer
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
the vehicle until it cools down. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
Wait until there is no sign of vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on front. If the warning does not come
the hood. Grades” under Trailer Towing on back on, continue to drive normally.
page 9‑62.
If you keep driving when the If the warning continues, pull over,
If the overheat warning is displayed stop, and park the vehicle
engine is overheated, the liquids
with no sign of steam: right away.
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the 1. Turn the air conditioning off. If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine if it overheats, and get out 2. Turn the heater on to the highest engine for three minutes while
of the vehicle until the engine temperature and to the highest parked. If the warning is still
is cool. fan speed. Open the windows as displayed, turn off the engine
necessary. until it cools down.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Engine Fan Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Fluid
This vehicle has a clutched engine
cooling fan. When the clutch is 1. Turn the key off and let the
engaged, the fan spins faster to engine compartment cool down.
provide more air to cool the engine. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
In most everyday driving conditions, reservoir clean.
the clutch is not engaged. This
improves fuel economy and reduces 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle The power steering fluid reservoir is dipstick with a clean rag.
loading, trailer towing and/or high located near the front of the engine 4. Replace the cap and completely
outside temperatures, the fan speed compartment, behind the radiator. tighten it.
increases when the clutch engages. See Engine Compartment Overview
So you may hear an increase in fan on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. 5. Then remove the cap again and
noise. This is normal and should not look at the fluid level on the
be mistaken as the transmission When to Check Power Steering dipstick.
slipping or making extra shifts. It is Fluid The level should be between the
merely the cooling system It is not necessary to regularly ADD and FULL marks. If necessary,
functioning properly. The fan will check power steering fluid unless add only enough fluid to bring the
slow down when additional cooling there is a leak suspected in the level up to the proper range.
is not required and the clutch system or an unusual noise is
disengages. heard. A fluid loss in this system
This fan noise may also be heard could indicate a problem. Have the
when the engine is started. It will go system inspected and repaired.
away as the fan clutch disengages.
10-26 Vehicle Care
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid Notice

To determine what kind of fluid to . When using concentrated
use, see Recommended Fluids and washer fluid, follow the
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always manufacturer's instructions
use the proper fluid. for adding water.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid . Do not mix water with
may damage the vehicle and the ready-to-use washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by Water can cause the solution
Open the cap with the washer to freeze and damage the
the vehicle's warranty. Always
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until washer fluid tank and other
use the correct fluid listed in
the tank is full. See Engine parts of the washer system.
Recommended Fluids and
Compartment Overview on Also, water does not clean as
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. well as washer fluid.
Washer Fluid . Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
What to Use very cold. This allows for
When windshield washer fluid is fluid expansion if freezing
needed, be sure to read the occurs, which could damage
manufacturer's instructions before the tank if it is
use. If operating the vehicle in an completely full.
area where the temperature may fall . Do not use engine coolant
below freezing, use a fluid that has (antifreeze) in the windshield
sufficient protection against washer. It can damage the
freezing. windshield washer system
and paint.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Brakes Notice: Continuing to drive with maintenance. When the front brake
worn-out brake pads could result pads are replaced, have the rear
This vehicle has front disc brakes in costly brake repair. brakes inspected, too.
and rear drum brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates Brake linings should always be
Disc brake pads have built-in wear can cause a brake squeal when the replaced as complete axle sets.
indicators that make a high-pitched brakes are first applied or lightly
warning sound when the brake pads applied. This does not mean Brake Pedal Travel
are worn and new pads are needed. something is wrong with the brakes. See your dealer if the brake pedal
The sound can come and go or be does not return to normal height,
heard all the time the vehicle is Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake or if there is a rapid increase in
moving, except when applying the pedal travel. This could be a sign
brake pedal firmly. pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and that brake service might be
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the required.
{ WARNING proper sequence to torque Brake Adjustment
The brake wear warning sound specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2. Every time the brakes are applied,
means that soon the brakes will with or without the vehicle moving,
not work well. That could lead to Rear drum brakes do not have wear the brakes adjust for wear.
a crash. When the brake wear indicators, but if a rear brake
warning sound is heard, have the rubbing noise is heard, have the
vehicle serviced. rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected
each time the tires are removed for
rotation or changing. Drum brakes
have an inspection hole to inspect
lining wear during scheduled
10-28 Vehicle Care
Replacing Brake System Parts Brake Fluid Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
The braking system on a vehicle is
If fluid is added when the linings are
complex. Its many parts have to be
worn, there will be too much fluid
of top quality and work well together
when new brake linings are
if the vehicle is to have really good
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
braking. The vehicle was designed
as necessary, only when work is
and tested with top-quality brake
done on the brake hydraulic system.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get The brake master cylinder reservoir
new, approved replacement parts. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See { WARNING
If this is not done, the brakes might Engine Compartment Overview on
not work properly. For example, If too much brake fluid is added, it
page 10‑6 for the location of the
installing disc brake pads that are can spill on the engine and burn,
reservoir.
wrong for the vehicle, can change if the engine is hot enough. You
the balance between the front and There are only two reasons why the or others could be burned, and
rear brakes— for the worse. The brake fluid level in the reservoir the vehicle could be damaged.
braking performance expected can might go down: Add brake fluid only when work is
change in many other ways if the . The brake fluid level goes down done on the brake hydraulic
wrong replacement brake parts are because of normal brake lining system. See “Checking Brake
installed. wear. When new linings are Fluid” in this section.
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
. A fluid leak in the brake to determine when to check the
hydraulic system can also cause brake fluid. See Maintenance
a low fluid level. Have the brake Schedule on page 11‑3.
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Checking Brake Fluid What to Add Notice

Check brake fluid by looking at the Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid can
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine from a sealed container. See badly damage brake
Compartment Overview on Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. For
page 10‑6. Lubricants on page 11‑12. example, just a few drops of
Always clean the brake fluid mineral-based oil, such as
reservoir cap and the area around engine oil, in the brake
the cap before removing it. This hydraulic system can
helps keep dirt from entering the damage brake hydraulic
reservoir. system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
{ WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
brakes might not work well. This the paint finish can be
could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
The fluid level should be above the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
PP mark. If it is not, have the brake immediately.
hydraulic system checked to see if
there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake
hydraulic system, make sure the
level is above the PP mark but not
over the MAX mark.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Battery Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive

Refer to the replacement number Transfer Case
shown on the original battery label { WARNING
when a new battery is needed. See When to Check Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
Engine Compartment Overview on Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
you and gas that can explode.
page 10‑6 for battery location. to determine how often to check the
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on lubricant. See Maintenance
{ WARNING page 10‑87 for tips on working Schedule on page 11‑3.
Battery posts, terminals, and around a battery without How to Check Lubricant
related accessories contain lead getting hurt.
To get an accurate reading, the
and lead compounds, chemicals vehicle should be on a level
known to the State of California to Infrequent Usage: Remove the surface.
cause cancer and reproductive black, negative (−) cable from the
harm. Wash hands after handling. battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Front Axle If the level is below the bottom of

the filler plug hole, located on the
When to Check and Change front axle, some lubricant may need
Lubricant to be added.
It is not necessary to regularly When the differential is cold, add
check the front axle fluid unless enough lubricant to raise the level to
there is a leak suspected or an 12 mm (1/2 in) below the fill
unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss plug hole.
could indicate a problem. Have it When the differential is at operating
inspected and repaired. temperature (warm), add enough
How to Check Lubricant lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the fill plug hole.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug What to Use
If the level is below the bottom of See Recommended Fluids and
the fill plug hole, located on the Lubricants on page 11‑12.
transfer case, some lubricant will
need to be added. Remove the plug
and add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the fill plug
hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Rear Axle The proper level is from 0 mm to 2. Firmly apply both the parking
10 mm (0 to 3/8 in) below the bottom brake and the regular brake.
When to Check and Change of the fill plug hole, located on the See Parking Brake on
Lubricant rear axle. page 9‑45.
It is not necessary to regularly What to Use Do not use the accelerator
check rear axle fluid unless there is pedal, and be ready to turn off
a leak suspected or an unusual See Recommended Fluids and the engine immediately if it
noise is heard. A fluid loss could Lubricants on page 11‑12 to starts.
indicate a problem. Have it determine which kind of lubricant
to use. 3. For automatic transmission
inspected and repaired. vehicles, try to start the engine
How to Check Lubricant Starter Switch Check in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
{ WARNING in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could For manual transmission
move suddenly. If the vehicle vehicles, put the shift lever in
moves, you or others could be Neutral, push the clutch pedal
injured. down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
1. Before starting this check, be is pushed down all the way to
sure there is enough room the floor. If the vehicle starts
around the vehicle. when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Ignition Transmission

See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control page 9‑45.
Lock Check
Function Check Be ready to apply the regular While parked, and with the parking
brake immediately if the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to
{ WARNING begins to move. LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
When you are doing this 3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
. For automatic transmission
inspection, the vehicle could vehicles, the ignition should turn
move suddenly. If the vehicle engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the to LOCK/OFF only when the
moves, you or others could be shift lever is in P (Park).
injured. shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever . For manual transmission
moves out of P (Park), contact vehicles, the ignition should turn
1. Before starting this check, be your dealer for service. to LOCK/OFF only when you
sure there is enough room press the key release button.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface. On all vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should be
the parking brake. inspected for wear and cracking.
{ WARNING . To check the parking brake's
See Maintenance Schedule on
When you are doing this check, holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in Replacement blades come in
the vehicle could begin to move. different types and are removed in
You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake different ways. For proper type
and property could be damaged. and length, see Maintenance
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front Replacement Parts on page 11‑15.
held by the parking brake only.
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) Allowing the wiper blade arm to
mechanism's holding ability: touch the windshield when no wiper
brake at once should the vehicle
With the engine running, shift to blade is installed could damage the
begin to move.
P (Park). Then release the windshield. Any damage that occurs
parking brake followed by the would not be covered by the vehicle
regular brake. warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
Contact your dealer if service is
required. 1. To remove the old wiper blades,
lift the wiper arm until it locks
into a vertical position.
Vehicle Care 10-35
2. Press down on the blade

assembly pivot locking tab. Pull
down on the blade assembly to
release it from the wiper
arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the
blade assembly. The insert has
two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the
blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the
blade assembly.
A. Blade Assembly 4. To install the new wiper insert,
B. Arm Assembly slide the insert (D), notched end
last, into the end with two blade
C. Locking Tab claws (A). Slide the insert all the
D. Blade Pivot way through the blade claws at
E. Hook Slot the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the
F. Arm Hook insert is fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are
locked by the bottom claws.
Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both
sides of the insert slots.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement

Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment. page 10‑39.
However, if the vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact
be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer.
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
A. Claw in Notch { WARNING
If the headlamps need to be
B. Correct Installation re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized
C. Incorrect Installation the vehicle be taken to the dealer gas inside and can burst if you
for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in others could be injured. Be sure
the wiper arm hook. Pull up until to read and follow the instructions
the pivot locking tab locks in the on the bulb package.
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm
and blade assembly onto the
windshield.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Headlamps Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps
3. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise to remove it
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime from the headlamp assembly
Running Lamps (DRL) and pull it straight out.
B. High-Beam Headlamp 4. Unplug the electrical connector
from the old bulb by releasing
To replace one of these bulbs:
the clips on the bulb socket.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
5. Pull the old bulb straight out. A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
page 10‑5.
6. Push the new bulb straight in B. Turn Signal/Taillamp
2. Reach in and access the bulb
until it clicks to secure it.
sockets from inside the engine C. Back‐up Lamp
compartment. 7. Plug in the electrical connector
to the new bulb socket.
8. Push the bulb socket straight in
and turn it clockwise to secure it
in the headlamp assembly.
10-38 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 5. Holding the socket, pull the old
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate bulb straight out to release it
on page 2‑8. from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the
taillamp assembly and turn it
counterclockwise and remove it
clockwise to secure.
from the lamp assembly.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb
and tighten the screws.
to release it from the socket.
Center High-Mounted 4. Push the new bulb into the
socket until it clicks.
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
5. Insert the bulb socket into the
To replace the CHMSL bulb: lamp assembly and turn it
2. Remove the two rear lamp 1. Remove the two screws and lift clockwise to secure.
assembly screws near the off the lamp assembly from the 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and
tailgate latch. vehicle. tighten the screws.
3. Pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-39
License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs Bulb

Exterior Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs: Bulb Number
Exterior Lamp
Number Parking/Front Turn
3757KA
Cargo Lamp and Signal
Center High‐ Parking Lamp
912LL 3157A
Mounted (Inboard)
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Stoplamp, Rear
License Plate Bulb W5W LL Turn Signal,
3057
1. Reach under the rear bumper for Headlamps Taillamp, and
the bulb socket. Back‐up Lamp
High-beam 9005
2. Turn the bulb socket For replacement bulbs not listed
counterclockwise and pull the Low-beam/
Daytime here, contact your dealer.
bulb socket out of the connector. 9006
Running
3. Pull the old bulb straight out Lamp (DRL)
from the bulb socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight in
until it clicks to secure it.
5. Reach under the rear bumper to
reinstall the bulb socket into the
connector.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to secure it to the connector.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit combination of fuses and circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an breakers. This greatly reduces the
remain off.
electrical system overload. chance of fires caused by electrical
Windshield Wipers problems.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new
greatly reduces the chance of circuit one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload If you ever have a problem on the
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may road and do not have a spare fuse,
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. you can borrow one that has the
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow same amperage. Just pick some
from the windshield before using the feature of the vehicle that you can
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers. get along without — like the radio or
of the identical size and rating. cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,
If the overload is caused by an if it is the correct amperage.
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
a fuse needs to be replaced, the Replace it as soon as you can.
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Engine Compartment To remove the cover, push in on the

tab on the end of the cover and lift.
Fuse Block To reinstall the cover, line up the tab
and push down on the cover until
the tab clicks into place.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
The engine compartment fuse block

is located on the driver side of the
engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information on
location.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Antilock Brake Power Door
DR/LCK
System (ABS), Locks (If Equipped)
ABS ABS Module,
Daylight Running
Four‐Wheel Drive, DRL
Lamps
Gravity Sensor
Mass Air
ABS 1 ABS 1 (ABS Logic)
Flow (MAF)
ABS 2 ABS 2 (ABS Pump) Sensor, Can Purge
ERLS Solenoid, Air
AUX PWR 1 Accessory Power 1
Injector
AUX PWR 2 Accessory Power 2 Reactor (AIR)
The trailer brake relay is located on Relay
the bottom side of the battery BCK/UP Back-up Lights
harness. Climate Electronic Throttle
ETC
BLWR Control (ETC)
Fuses Usage Control Fan
CLSTR Cluster Fog Lamps
Oxygen Sensors, FOG/LAMP
(If Equipped)
Air Injection CNSTR Fuel Canister Vent
O2 SNSR Front Park/Turn
Reactor (AIR) VENT Solenoid
Relay Lamps, Driver and
Cruise Control FRT
Passenger Side
Air Conditioning Switch, Inside PRK LAMP
Power Window
A/C Control Head, Rearview Mirror, Switches Lighting
Power Seats CRUISE Transfer Case
Control Module, FRT/AXLE Front Axle Actuator
A/C Air Conditioning
CMPRSR Compressor Brake Switch, Fuel System
FSCM
Clutch Disable Control Module
Vehicle Care 10-43
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

BACKUP Power Windows STOP Stop Lamps
Backup Lamp PWR/WNDW
LAMP (If Equipped)
Starter Solenoid
STRTR
HORN Horn RDO Radio Relay
Heated Seat Rear Parking Truck Body
HTD/SEAT TBC
(If Equipped) Lamp 1, Passenger Controller
REAR
Side Taillamp,
Ignition, Clutch PRK LAMP Transmission
License Plate TCM
Starter Switch, Control Module
Lamps
Neutral Safety
Transfer Case
IGN Back‐Up Switch, Driver Side Rear TCCM
Control Module
Ignition Coils 1‐5, Taillamp,
Air Conditioning Passenger Side TRAILER
Trailer Brake
Relay Airbag Indicator BRAKE
REAR PRK
Lighting,
INJ Injectors LAMP2 Transmission
Instrument Panel TRANS
Solenoid
Driver Side Dimming Power
LT HDLP
Headlamp (2WD/4WD switch Turn/Hazard/
TRN/
lighting) Courtesy/Cargo
Power Control HAZRD FRT
PCM B Lamps/Mirrors
Module (PCM) B Passenger Side
RT HDLP TRN/
Power Control Headlamp Rear Turn/Hazard
PCMI HAZRD
Module (PCM) Regulated Voltage Lights
RVC REAR
Power Seat Circuit Control
Vehicle Stability
PWR/SEAT Breaker S/ROOF Not Used
VSES/STOP Enhancement
(If Equipped)
System/Stop
10-44 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage

WPR Wiper Front Parking Starter Relay (PCM
STRTR
PRK/LAMP Lamp Fuse, Rear Relay)
Wiper/Washer
WSW Parking Lamps
Switch Vehicle Stability
Powertrain, VSES Enhancement
Relays Usage Electronic Throttle System
PWR/TRN Control Fuse,
A/C Air Conditioning WPR Wipers (On/Off)
Oxygen
CMPRSR Compressor Sensor Fuse WPR 2 Wiper 2 (High/Low)
Backup Lamp Backup Lamp Retained
Accessory Miscellaneous Usage
BEAM SEL Beam Selection
Power (Power Diode — Air
Daylight Running RAP
DRL Window Fuse, A/C CLTCH Conditioning,
Lamps Wiper/Washer Clutch
Fog Lamps Switch Fuse)
FOG/LAMP MEGA FUSE Mega Fuse
(If Equipped) Run/Crank, Airbag
System Fuse, Diode —
HDLP Headlamps WPR
Cruise Control Wiper
HORN Horn Fuse, Ignition
Ignition 3, Climate Fuse, Back-Up
RUN/CRNK
Control, Climate Lamps, ABS Fuse,
IGN 3 HVAC Control Head Front Axle, PCM-1,
Fuse, Power Injectors Fuse,
Seat Fuse Transmission
Fuse, ERLS
Vehicle Care 10-45
2.9L and 3.7L

10-46 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
Trailer Auxiliary
D
Maxi-Fuse
5.3L
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

A Trailer Park Lamp Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint
Communication
B C System, Sensing
Interface Module
and Diagnostic
Module
Vehicle Care 10-47
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. See Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact— such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure.
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑19. (Continued)
(Continued)
10-48 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the (D) Tire Identification Number
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (TIN): The letters and numbers
Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. following the DOT (Department
molded into its sidewall. The of Transportation) code are
examples show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria the Tire Identification Number
passenger vehicle tire and a (TIN). The TIN shows the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to manufacturer and plant code,
GM's specific tire performance tire size, and date the tire was
criteria have a TPC specification manufactured. The TIN is
code molded onto the sidewall. molded onto both sides of the
GM's TPC specifications meet or tire, although only one side may
exceed all federal safety have the date of manufacture.
guidelines. (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
(C) DOT (Department of of cord and number of plies in
Transportation): The the sidewall and under the tread.
Department of Transportation (F) Uniform Tire Quality
(DOT) code indicates that the Grading (UTQG): Tire
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with manufacturers are required to
the U.S. Department of grade tires based on three
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle performance factors: treadwear,
combination of letters and Safety Standards. traction, and temperature
numbers used to define a resistance. For more information
particular tire's width, height, see Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Grading on page 10‑65.
Vehicle Care 10-49
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation driven at speeds over 105 km/h (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that (65 mph). The compact spare Load Limit: Maximum load
can be carried and the tire is for emergency use when a that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to regular road tire has lost air and maximum pressure needed to
support that load. gone flat. If the vehicle has a support that load.
compact spare tire, see (E) Tire Inflation: The
Compact Spare Tire on temporary use tire or compact
page 10‑85 and If a Tire Goes spare tire should be inflated to
Flat on page 10‑69. 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
(C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and
(TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Tire Pressure on
following the DOT (Department page 10‑54.
of Transportation) code are (F) Tire Size: A combination of
the Tire Identification Number letters and numbers define a
(TIN). The TIN shows the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
manufacturer and plant code, construction type, and service
Compact Spare Tire Example tire size, and date the tire was description. The letter T as the
manufactured. The TIN is first character in the tire size
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
molded onto both sides of the means the tire is for temporary
of cord and number of plies in
tire, although only one side may use only.
the sidewall and under the tread.
have the date of manufacture.
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 mi) and should not be
10-50 Vehicle Care
(G) TPC Spec (Tire item C of the illustration, it would

Performance Criteria mean that the tire's sidewall is
Specification): Original 60 percent as high as it is wide.
equipment tires designed to (D) Construction Code: A
GM's specific tire performance letter code is used to indicate
criteria have a TPC specification the type of ply construction in
code molded onto the sidewall. (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a the tire. The letter R means
GM's TPC specifications meet or radial ply construction; the
exceed all federal safety metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in letter D means diagonal or bias
guidelines. ply construction; and the letter B
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to means belted‐bias ply
Tire Designations construction.
standards set by the U.S. Tire
Tire Size and Rim Association. (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
The following is an example of a (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit the wheel in inches.
typical passenger vehicle number indicates the tire section (F) Service Description: These
tire size. width in millimeters from characters represent the load
sidewall to sidewall. index and speed rating of the
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit tire. The load index represents
number that indicates the tire the load carrying capacity a tire
height‐to‐width measurements. is certified to carry. The speed
For example, if the tire size rating is the maximum speed a
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in tire is certified to carry a load.
Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire
cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
the tread.
Accessory Weight: The designator which can also
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) date of production.
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
steering, power brakes, power Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑54. on page 9‑19.
conditioning.
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Rating for the front axle. See
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑19.
cords that is located between and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See
may be made from steel or other Vehicle Load Limits on
reinforcing materials. page 9‑19.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A

The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. Load Limits on page 9‑19. Pressure on page 10‑54 and
Occupant Distribution : Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 9‑19.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
load rating for a tire at the Sidewall: The portion of a tire
higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Speed Rating: An UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Maximum Load on the
alphanumeric code assigned to Grading Standards): A tire Tire: Load on an individual tire
a tire indicating the maximum information system that due to curb weight, accessory
speed at which a tire can provides consumers with weight, occupant weight, and
operate. ratings for a tire's traction, cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between temperature, and treadwear. Vehicle Placard: A label
the tire and the road surface. Ratings are determined permanently attached to a
The amount of grip provided. by tire manufacturers using vehicle showing the vehicle
government testing procedures. capacity weight and the original
Tread: The portion of a tire that The ratings are molded into the
comes into contact with equipment tire size and
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform recommended inflation pressure.
the road. Tire Quality Grading on See “Tire and Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow page 10‑65. Information Label” under Vehicle
bands, sometimes called wear Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Load Limits on page 9‑19.
bars, that show across the tread number of designated seating
of a tire when only 1.6 mm positions multiplied by
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
When It Is Time for New Tires cargo load. See Vehicle Load
on page 10‑62. Limits on page 9‑19.
10-54 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure
. Rough ride. When to Check
Tires need the correct amount of
. Needless damage from Check your tires once a month
air pressure to operate road hazards. or more. Do not forget to check
effectively. The Tire and Loading the spare tire. If the vehicle has
Information label on the vehicle a compact spare tire, it should
Notice: Neither tire be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See
underinflation nor indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire Compact Spare Tire on
overinflation is good. page 10‑85 and Full-Size Spare
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The
recommended pressure is the Tire on page 10‑86 for additional
that do not have enough air, information.
can result in: minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum How to Check
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity.
overheating which could Use a good quality pocket-type
lead to a blowout. For additional information gauge to check tire pressure.
regarding how much weight the Proper tire inflation cannot be
. Premature or vehicle can carry, and an determined by looking at the tire.
irregular wear. example of the Tire and Loading Check the tire inflation pressure
. Poor handling. Information label, see Vehicle when the tires are cold, meaning
Load Limits on page 9‑19. How the vehicle has not been driven
. Reduced fuel economy. the vehicle is loaded affects for at least three hours or no
Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle handling and ride more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
have too much air, can comfort. Never load the vehicle
result in: with more weight than it was
. Unusual wear. designed to carry.
. Poor handling.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P235/50R18 size tires
tire valve stem. Press the tire require inflation pressure adjustment
High-Speed Operation when driving the vehicle at speeds
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
{ WARNING Set the cold inflation pressure to the
maximum inflation pressure shown
matches the recommended Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h on the tire sidewall, or 241 kPa
pressure on the Tire and (100 mph) or higher, puts an (35 psi), whichever is lower. See the
Loading Information label, no additional strain on tires. example following. Return the tires
further adjustment is necessary. Sustained high-speed driving to the recommended cold tire
If the inflation pressure is low, causes excessive heat buildup inflation pressure when high-speed
add air until the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure. driving has ended. See Vehicle
pressure is reached. If the You could have a crash and you Load Limits on page 9‑19 and Tire
inflation pressure is high, press or others could be killed. Some Pressure on page 10‑54.
on the metal stem in the center high-speed rated tires require Example:
of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When The maximum load and inflation
Re‐check the tire pressure with speed limits and road conditions pressure is molded on the tire
the tire gauge. sidewall, in small letters, near
are such that a vehicle can be
the rim flange. It will read
Return the valve caps on the driven at high speeds, make sure
something like this: Maximum load
valve stems to prevent leaks the tires are rated for high-speed 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
and keep out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition, Max. Press.
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the For this example, set the inflation
vehicle load. pressure for high‐speed driving at
241 kPa (35 psi).
10-56 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be
(if provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under‐inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
As an added safety feature, your
TPMS to continue to function
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been properly.
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑57 for
additional information.
Vehicle Care 10-57
Federal Communications and displays see Driver Information

Commission (FCC) Rules and Center (DIC) on page 5‑20 and Tire
with Industry Canada Messages on page 5‑27.
Standards The low tire pressure warning light
See Radio Frequency Statement on may come on in cool weather when
page 13‑22 for information the vehicle is first started, and then
When a low tire pressure condition turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the
Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light air pressure is getting low and
Rules and with Industry Canada
located on the instrument cluster. needs to be inflated to the proper
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the warning light comes on, stop pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate A Tire and Loading Information label
the tires to the recommended shows the size of the original
Operation pressure shown on the tire loading equipment tires and the correct
This vehicle may have a Tire information label. See Vehicle Load inflation pressure for the tires when
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Limits on page 9‑19. they are cold. See Vehicle Load
The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in Limits on page 9‑19, for an example
driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver of the Tire and Loading Information
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC). The low label and its location on your
mounted onto each tire and wheel tire pressure warning light and the vehicle. Also see Tire Pressure on
assembly on your vehicle, excluding DIC warning message come on at page 10‑54.
the spare tire. The TPMS sensors each ignition cycle until the tires are
monitor the air pressure in your tires inflated to the correct inflation
and transmit the tire pressure pressure. For additional information
readings to a receiver located in the and details about the DIC operation
vehicle.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you TPMS Malfunction Light and
. The TPMS sensor matching
about a low tire pressure condition Message process was not done or not
but it does not replace normal tire completed successfully after
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly rotating the vehicle's tires. The
on page 10‑60, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
page 10‑60 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off once the
page 10‑47. system detects a malfunction, the TPMS sensor matching process
low tire pressure warning light is performed successfully. See
Notice: Tire sealant materials are flashes for about one minute and “TPMS Sensor Matching
not all the same. A non-approved then stays on for the remainder of Process” later in this section.
tire sealant could damage the the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor message also displays. The
. One or more TPMS sensors are
damage caused by using an malfunction light and DIC warning missing or damaged. The
incorrect tire sealant is not message come on at each ignition malfunction light and the DIC
covered by the vehicle warranty. cycle until the problem is corrected. message should go off when the
Always use only the Some of the conditions that can TPMS sensors are installed and
GM-approved tire sealant cause these to come on are: the sensor matching process is
available through your dealer or performed successfully. See
included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
TPMS sensor. The malfunction not match the original equipment
light and the DIC message tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should go off after the road tire other than those recommended
is replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
matching process is performed functioning properly. See Buying
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 10‑62.
Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-59

. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the The TPMS warning light should
being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire, continue flashing throughout the
wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger matching procedure. The LOW
TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear. TIRE message displays on the
sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool. 4. Start with the driver side
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There is one minute to match the front tire.
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and
for service if the TPMS malfunction 5. Place the relearn tool against
five minutes overall to match all four the tire sidewall, near the valve
light and DIC message comes on tire/wheel positions. If it takes
and stays on. stem. Then press the button to
longer, the matching process stops activate the TPMS sensor.
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. A horn chirp confirms that the
Process The TPMS sensor matching sensor identification code has
procedure is: been matched to this tire and
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
1. Set the parking brake. wheel position.
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 6. Proceed to the passenger side
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off. front tire, and repeat the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or procedure in Step 5.
more of the TPMS sensors. Also, 3. Turn the exterior lamp switch
from AUTO to OFF four times 7. Proceed to the passenger side
the TPMS sensor matching process rear tire, and repeat the
should be performed after replacing within three seconds. A double
horn chirp will sound and the procedure in Step 5.
a spare tire with a road tire
containing the TPMS sensor. The TPMS low tire warning light 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
malfunction light and the DIC starts flashing. The double horn tire, and repeat the procedure in
message should go off at the next chirp and flashing TPMS Step 5.
ignition cycle. The sensors are warning light indicates the TPMS
matched to the tire/wheel positions, matching process has started.
10-60 Vehicle Care
9. After hearing the confirming horn Tire Inspection

. The tire has a puncture, cut,
chirp for the driver side rear tire, or other damage that cannot
check to see if the TPMS low tire We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of
warning light and the DIC LOW including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
TIRE messages have turned off. vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
If yes, the TPMS sensors have for signs of wear or damage at
been relearned. Turn the ignition least once a month. Tire Rotation
switch to LOCK/OFF.
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
If the low tire warning light and
the SERV TPM message on the . The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
DIC are on after completing more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
Step 5 for the driver side rear can be seen. page 11‑3.
tire, the sensor relearn process Tires are rotated to achieve a
has not been successful. Turn
. There is cord or fabric
the ignition to LOCK/OFF and showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
repeat the matching process rubber. first rotation is the most
beginning with Step 2. important.
. The tread or sidewall is
10. Set all four tires to the cracked, cut, or snagged Any time unusual wear is
recommended air pressure deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon
level as indicated on the Tire fabric. as possible and check the wheel
and Loading Information label. alignment. Also check for
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. See
or split. When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑62 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑67.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Adjust the front and rear tires to

the recommended inflation { WARNING
pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Loading Information label after parts to which it is fastened, can
the tires have been rotated. See make wheel nuts become loose
Tire Pressure on page 10‑54 after time. The wheel could come
and Vehicle Load Limits on off and cause an accident. When
page 9‑19. changing a wheel, remove any
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor rust or dirt from places where the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Monitor Operation on
towel can be used; however, use
Use this rotation pattern when page 10‑57.
a scraper or wire brush later to
rotating the tires. Check that all wheel nuts are remove all rust or dirt.
If the vehicle has a compact properly tightened. See “Wheel
spare tire, do not include it in the Nut Torque” under Capacities Lightly coat the center of the
tire rotation. and Specifications on wheel hub with wheel bearing
page 12‑2. grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
10-62 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New See Tire Inspection on page 10‑60 Parking for an extended period can
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑60 for cause flat spots on the tires that
Tires additional information. may result in vibrations while
Factors, such as maintenance, The rubber in tires ages over time. driving. When storing a vehicle for
temperatures, driving speeds, This also applies to the spare tire, at least a month, remove the tires or
vehicle loading, and road conditions if the vehicle has one, even if it is raise the vehicle to reduce the
affect the wear rate of the tires. never used. Multiple conditions weight from the tires.
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure Buying New Tires
maintenance affect how fast aging GM has developed and matched
takes place. Tires will typically need specific tires for the vehicle. The
to be replaced due to wear before original equipment tires installed
they may need to be replaced were designed to meet General
due to age. Consult the tire Motors Tire Performance Criteria
manufacturer for more information Specification (TPC Spec) system
on when tires should be replaced. rating. When replacement tires are
Vehicle Storage needed, GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same TPC
Tires age when stored normally Spec rating.
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Treadwear indicators are one way to a vehicle that will be stored for at
tell when it is time for new tires. least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Treadwear indicators appear when area away from direct sunlight to
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) slow aging. This area should be
or less of tread remaining. Some free of grease, gasoline or other
commercial truck tires may not have substances that can deteriorate
treadwear indicators. rubber.
Vehicle Care 10-63
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system

considers over a dozen critical { WARNING { WARNING
specifications that impact the
overall performance of the Tires could explode during Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, including brake system improper service. Attempting vehicle may cause the wheel
performance, ride and handling, to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks
traction control, and tire pressure could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
monitoring performance. GM's TPC Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail
Spec number is molded onto the tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash.
tire's sidewall near the tire size. mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
If the tires have an all‐season tread the wheels on the vehicle.
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on { WARNING If the vehicle tires must be replaced
with a tire that does not have a TPC
page 10‑48 for additional
information. Mixing tires of different sizes, Spec number, make sure they are
brands, or types may cause the same size, load range, speed
GM recommends replacing all the rating, and construction (radial) as
tires at the same time. Uniform tread loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in a crash or other the original tires.
depth on all tires will help to
maintain the performance of the vehicle damage. Use the
vehicle. Braking and handling correct size, brand, and type
performance may be adversely of tires on all wheels.
affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑60 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑60 for
information on proper tire rotation.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire pressure Different Size Tires and

monitoring system could give an
Wheels
{ WARNING
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are If wheels or tires are installed that If different sized wheels are used,
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor are a different size than the original there may not be an acceptable
System on page 10‑56. equipment wheels and tires, vehicle level of performance and safety if
performance, including its braking, tires not recommended for those
The Tire and Loading Information wheels are selected. This
label indicates the original ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover increases the chance of a crash
equipment tires on the vehicle. See
may be affected. If the vehicle has and serious injury. Only use GM
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19,
electronic systems such as antilock specific wheel and tire systems
for the label location and more
information about the Tire and brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for the vehicle, and
Loading Information label. control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a
control, the performance of these GM certified technician.
systems can also be affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑62 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑4 for
additional information.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Uniform Tire Quality use spare tires, tires with Treadwear

Grading nominal rim diameters of The treadwear grade is a
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found or to some limited-production
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
tires. under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For While the tires available on specified government test
example: General Motors passenger cars course. For example, a tire
and light trucks may vary with graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA respect to these grades, they a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A must also conform to federal government course as a tire
The following information relates safety requirements and graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the additional General Motors Tire performance of tires depends
United States National Highway Performance Criteria (TPC) upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration standards. their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires All Passenger Car Tires Must depart significantly from the
by treadwear, traction, and Conform to Federal Safety norm due to variations in driving
temperature performance. This Requirements In Addition To habits, service practices
applies only to vehicles sold in These Grades. and differences in road
the United States. The grades characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
10-66 Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C established for a tire that is

The traction grades, from The temperature grades are A properly inflated and not
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, (the highest), B, and C, overloaded. Excessive speed,
and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance underinflation, or excessive
the tire's ability to stop on wet to the generation of heat and its loading, either separately or in
pavement as measured under ability to dissipate heat when combination, can cause heat
controlled conditions on tested under controlled buildup and possible tire failure.
specified government test conditions on a specified indoor
surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained Wheel Alignment and Tire
concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause the Balance
have poor traction performance. material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels were aligned
Warning: The traction grade and reduce tire life, and and balanced at the factory to
assigned to this tire is based on excessive temperature can lead provide the longest tire life and best
straight-ahead braking traction to sudden tire failure. The grade overall performance. Adjustments to
tests, and does not include C corresponds to a level of wheel alignment and tire balancing
acceleration, cornering, performance which all will not be necessary on a regular
hydroplaning, or peak traction passenger car tires must meet basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
characteristics. under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
A represent higher levels of vibrates when driving on a smooth
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might
test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
temperature grade for this tire is
Vehicle Care 10-67
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replacing a wheel with a used
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
one is dangerous. How it has
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Some aluminum wheels can be driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
repaired. See your dealer if any of fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
new GM original equipment
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
wheel.
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the Notice: The wrong wheel can
same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with bearing
diameter, width, offset, and be life, brake cooling, speedometer
mounted the same way as the one it or odometer calibration,
replaces. headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
or tire chain clearance to the
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
body and chassis.
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
10-68 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire
size other than P215/70R16, P235/
75R16, P265/70R17, P235/50R18,
{ WARNING Use another type of traction or P265/65R18 use tire chains
device only if its manufacturer only where legal and only when
If your vehicle has P215/70R16, recommends it for use on your you must. Use chains that are the
P235/75R16, P265/70R17, P235/ vehicle and tire size combination proper size for your tires. Install
50R18, or P265/65R18 size tires, and road conditions. Follow that them on the tires of the rear axle.
do not use tire chains. They can manufacturer's instructions. To Do not use chains on the tires of
damage your vehicle because help avoid damage to your the front axle. Tighten them as
there is not enough clearance. vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, tightly as possible with the
Tire chains used on a vehicle or remove the device if it is ends securely fastened. Drive
without the proper amount of contacting your vehicle. Do not slowly and follow the chain
clearance can cause damage to spin the vehicle's wheels. manufacturer's instructions.
the brakes, suspension, or other If you can hear the chains
vehicle parts. The area damaged If you do find traction devices that contacting your vehicle, stop and
by the tire chains could cause you will fit, install them on the rear retighten them. If the contact
to lose control of your vehicle and tires. continues, slow down until it
you or others may be injured in a stops. Driving too fast or
crash. spinning the wheels with chains
(Continued) on will damage your vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-69
If a Tire Goes Flat

{ WARNING { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause Lifting a vehicle and getting
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire. under it to do maintenance or
out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has repairs is dangerous without the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a been driven on while severely appropriate safety equipment and
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a training. If a jack is provided with
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. the vehicle, it is designed only for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire changing a flat tire. If it is used for
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while anything else, you or others could
toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat. be badly injured or killed if the
the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or is provided with the vehicle, only
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as use it for changing a flat tire.
gently brake to a stop, well off the possible.
road, if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
A rear blowout, particularly on a and wheel damage by driving slowly
curve, acts much like a skid and to a level place, well off the road,
may require the same correction as if possible. Turn on the hazard
used in a skid. Stop pressing the warning flashers. See Hazard
accelerator pedal and steer to Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
10-70 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
Changing a tire can be 4. Turn off the engine and do the wheel blocks (A).
dangerous. The vehicle can slip not restart while the vehicle
off the jack and roll over or fall is raised.
causing injury or death. Find a 5. Do not allow passengers to
level place to change the tire. To remain in the vehicle.
help prevent the vehicle from
moving: 6. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
1. Set the parking brake firmly. opposite corner of the tire
2. Put an automatic being changed.
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in A. Wheel Block
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
B. Flat Tire
3. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, be sure the The following information explains
transfer case is in a drive how to use the jack and change
gear– not in N (Neutral). a tire.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-71
Tire Changing Put the tools to the side while you

access the jack and wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and
Regular/Extended Cab
Tools
For regular and extended cab
vehicles, the jack and wheel blocks
are located under the cover at the
center of the vehicle behind the
front seats.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
D. Jack Knob
A. Wing Nut
2. Lower the jack (A) by turning the
B. Storage Bag and Tools jack knob (D) counterclockwise
The tools are located under the right to release the jack (A) from the
front passenger seat. bracket.
1. Move the seat all the way 1. Turn the wing nut on the cover 3. Turn the wing nut (C)
forward to locate the tool bag. counterclockwise to remove it. counterclockwise to release the
wheel blocks (B).
2. Turn the wing nut (A)
counterclockwise to release the
tool bag (B).
10-72 Vehicle Care
Crew Cab 3. Turn the wing nut

For crew cab models, the jack and counterclockwise to remove the
wheel blocks are located under the wheel blocks and the wheel
driver side rear seat. block retainer.
1. Reach under the rear seat to Use the jack handle extensions and
access the jack and wheel the wheel wrench to remove the
blocks. underbody-mounted spare tire.
A. Jack Handle Extensions

B. Jack
C. Jack Handle
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Wheel Blocks
2. Turn the jack knob

counterclockwise to lower the
jack all the way and release it
from the bracket.
Vehicle Care 10-73
If the spare tire does not lower to

the ground, the secondary latch
is engaged causing the tire not
to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 10‑82.
1. Assemble the wheel wrench, the 2. Insert the chiseled end of the
jack handle extensions, and the jack handle at a slight angle
jack handle, as shown. through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the
funnel-shaped guide.
3. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the 4. Tilt the retainer when the tire has
spare tire to the ground. been lowered, and slide it up the
Continue to turn the wheel cable so it can be pulled up
wrench until the spare tire can through the wheel opening.
be pulled out from under the 5. Put the spare tire near the
vehicle. flat tire.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and D. Wheel Wrench

Installing the Spare Tire E. Wheel Blocks
Use the following pictures and 1. Do a safety check before
instructions to remove the flat tire proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
and raise the vehicle. Flat on page 10‑69 for more
information.

counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
the wheel nuts yet.
A. Jack Handle Extensions

B. Jack 2. Remove the center cap by
C. Jack Handle placing the chisel end of the
wheel wrench into one of the
slots on the wheel and gently
prying the cap out.
Vehicle Care 10-75
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack you could
be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING Front Position Front Position

Raising the vehicle with the jack 4. Position the jack under the If the flat tire is on the front of
improperly positioned can vehicle, as shown, for the front the vehicle, position the jack to
damage the vehicle and even or rear locations. the rear of the front tire in the
make the vehicle fall. To help pocket off of the frame.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
10-76 Vehicle Care

clockwise to raise the vehicle. { WARNING
Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
room for the spare tire to fit parts to which it is fastened, can
under the wheel well. make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Rear Position towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
If the flat tire is on the rear, remove all rust or dirt.
position the jack under the rear
axle and get as close as
possible to the shock absorber.
5. Make sure the jack head is
positioned so that the rear axle 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
is resting securely between the the flat tire.
grooves that are on the
jack head.
Vehicle Care 10-77
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the 10. Put the wheel nuts back on Front Position
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces with the rounded end of the
and spare wheel. nuts toward the wheel. Tighten
9. Install the spare tire. each wheel nut by hand. Then
use the wheel wrench to
tighten the nuts until the wheel
{ WARNING is held against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10-78 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Rear Position Notice: Improperly tightened 12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
11. Turn the wheel wrench wheel nuts can lead to brake a crisscross sequence, as
counterclockwise to lower the pulsation and rotor damage. To shown, by turning the wheel
vehicle. Lower the jack avoid expensive brake repairs, wrench clockwise.
completely. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the Reinstall the center cap when the
proper torque specification. See regular wheel and tire are
{ WARNING Capacities and Specifications on reinstalled. Place the cap on the
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut wheel and tap it into place until it is
Wheel nuts that are improperly or flush with the wheel. The cap only
torque specification.
incorrectly tightened can cause goes on one way. Be sure to line up
the wheels to become loose or the tab on the center cap with the
come off. The wheel nuts should indentation on the wheel.
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Store the tire under the rear of the
and Tools vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the
{ WARNING rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
3. Assemble the wheel wrench, the
jack handle extensions, and the
Notice: Storing an aluminum
jack handle, as shown.
wheel with a flat tire under your
2. Tilt the retainer downward and
vehicle for an extended period of
through the center wheel
time or with the valve stem
opening. Make sure the retainer
pointing up can damage the
is fully seated across the
wheel. Always stow the wheel
underside of the wheel.
with the valve stem pointing
down and have the wheel/tire
repaired as soon as possible.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Continue raising the tire, watch

to make sure it does not get
caught on anything on the
underbody. If the tire does get
caught, loosen two or three turns
and push and pull the tire and
then retighten.
Repeat this procedure as many
times as needed to ensure
proper stowage.
6. When the tire is properly seated
to the underbody, continue
4. Insert the chiseled end of the turning the wheel wrench 7. Make sure the tire is stored
jack handle at a slight angle clockwise until you hear two securely. Push, pull (A), and
through the hole in the rear clicks or feel it skip twice. You then try to turn (B) the tire. If the
bumper and into the cannot overtighten the cable. tire moves, check to make sure
funnel-shaped guide. the tire valve stem is pointing
5. Turn the wheel wrench down, then use the wheel
clockwise to raise the tire part wrench to loosen and then
way up. Make sure the retainer tighten the cable.
is seated in the wheel opening
and the valve stem is
pointed down.
Vehicle Care 10-81
To store the tools: To store the jack and wheel blocks: 3. Lower the jack (A) all the way
1. Return the tools to the and insert the jack into the
Regular/Extended Cab bracket.
storage bag.
2. Attach the storage bag to the 4. Raise the jack by turning the
floor under the front handle clockwise to secure the
passenger seat. jack within the bracket.
3. Reinstall the wing nut to secure

the bag to the vehicle.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Install the wheel blocks (B) first. 5. Put the cover in position and
insert and tighten the wing nut to
2. Turn the wing nut (C) clockwise secure it.
to secure the wheel blocks to the
vehicle.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Crew Cab 3. Turn the handle to raise the jack To release the spare tire from the
until it is secure, but do not secondary latch:
overtighten the jack in the
bracket.
Secondary Latch System

This vehicle has an underbody‐
mounted tire hoist assembly that
has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from
suddenly falling off the vehicle. For
the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the
valve stem pointing down. See
A. Jack “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
B. Wheel Blocks Tools” under Tire Changing on 1. Check under the vehicle to see if
page 10‑71. the cable end fitting is visible.
C. Wing Nut
2. If the cable end fitting is not
1. Attach the wheel blocks (B) to
the jack (A) with the wheel block
{ WARNING visible, proceed to Step 6.
retainer and the wing nut (C). Before beginning this procedure If it is visible, first try to tighten
read all the instructions. Failure to the cable by turning the wheel
2. Reinstall the jack and wheel wrench clockwise until you hear
block assembly in the mounting read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly two clicks or feel it skip twice.
bracket. Make sure to position The cable cannot be
the holes in the base of the jack and you and others could get
overtightened.
onto the pins in the mounting hurt. Read and follow the
bracket. instructions listed next.
Vehicle Care 10-83
3. Loosen the cable by turning the

wheel wrench counterclockwise
three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least
two times. If the spare tire
lowers to the ground, continue
with Step 5 under “Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools” under
Tire Changing on page 10‑71.
8. Attach the jack handle,
5. Turn the wrench extension, and wheel wrench to
counterclockwise until the jack and place it, with the
approximately 15 cm (6 in) of wheel blocks, under the vehicle
A. Jack
cable is exposed. towards the front of the rear
B. Wheel Blocks bumper. Position the center lift
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their
shortest ends, with the backs 7. Place the bottom edge of the point of the jack under the
facing each other. jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B). wheel.
Separate the wheel blocks so 9. Turn the wheel wrench
that the jack is balanced clockwise to raise the jack until it
securely. lifts the tire.
10. Continue raising the jack until
the tire stops moving upward
and is held firmly in place.
10-84 Vehicle Care
12. Reinsert the jack handle into If the spare tire is hanging from
the jack. Lower the jack by the cable, insert the hoist end
turning the wheel wrench of the extension into the hoist
counterclockwise. Keep shaft hole in the bumper and
lowering the jack until the turn the wheel wrench
spare tire slides off the jack or counterclockwise to lower the
is hanging by the cable. spare the rest of the way.
{ WARNING
Someone standing too close
during the procedure could be
11. Remove the jack handle and injured by the jack. If the spare
insert the hoist end of the tire does not slide off the jack
extension through the hole in completely, make sure no one is
the rear bumper. behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
Turn the wheel wrench under the spare. 14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end
counterclockwise one turn or of the cable and pull it through
until the wheel retainer the wheel opening. Pull the tire
assembly is disengaged. 13. Disconnect the jack handle out from under the vehicle.
from the jack and carefully
remove the jack. Use one hand
to push against the spare while
firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the
other hand.
Vehicle Care 10-85
15. If the cable is hanging under Notice: If the vehicle has The spare tire will last longer and be
the vehicle, turn the wheel four-wheel drive and the compact in good shape in case you need it
wrench clockwise to raise the spare tire is installed on the again.
cable. vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel Notice: When the compact spare
Have the hoist assembly drive until you can have the flat is installed, do not take the
inspected as soon as you can. tire repaired and/or replaced. You vehicle through an automatic car
A spare or flat tire can not be could damage the vehicle, and wash with guide rails. The
stored using the hoist the repair costs would not be compact spare can get caught on
assembly until it has been covered by your warranty. Never the rails which can damage the
replaced. use four-wheel drive when the tire, wheel, and other parts of the
compact spare tire is installed on vehicle.
To continue changing the flat tire, the vehicle.
see “Removing the Flat Tire and Do not use your compact spare on
Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire After installing the compact spare other vehicles.
Changing on page 10‑71. on your vehicle, you should stop as
soon as possible and make sure And do not mix your compact spare
your vehicle's spare tire is correctly tire or wheel with other wheels or
Compact Spare Tire inflated. The compact spare is made tires. They will not fit. Keep your
Your vehicle may have a compact to perform well at speeds up to spare tire and its wheel together.
spare tire. Although the compact 62 mph (100 km/h) for distances up Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
spare tire was fully inflated when to 500 miles (804 km). For heavy compact spare. Using them can
your vehicle was new, it can lose air payloads or towing, and for low damage the vehicle and can
over time. Check the inflation traction or four-wheel-drive damage the chains too. Do not
pressure regularly. It should be conditions, repair or replace the use tire chains on the compact
60 psi (420 kPa). full-size tire. Of course, it is best to spare.
replace your vehicle's spare with a
full-size tire as soon as you can.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Full-Size Spare Tire Your vehicle may have a different After installing the spare tire on your
size spare tire than the road tires vehicle, you should stop as soon as
Your vehicle may have a full-size originally installed on your vehicle. possible and make sure the spare is
spare tire, which, when new, was This spare was developed for use correctly inflated. The spare tire is
fully inflated. A spare tire may lose on your vehicle, so it is alright to made to perform well at speeds up
air over time, so check its inflation drive on it. If your vehicle has to 62 mph (100 km/h) for distances
pressure regularly. See Tire four-wheel drive and the different up to 500 miles (804 km). For heavy
Pressure on page 10‑54 and size spare tire is installed, keep the payloads or towing, and for low
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑19 vehicle in two-wheel drive. traction or four-wheel-drive
for information regarding proper tire conditions, repair or replace the
inflation and loading your vehicle. Notice: If the vehicle has
four-wheel drive and a different full-size tire. Have the damaged or
For instruction on how to remove, flat road tire repaired or replaced as
install, or store a spare tire, see size spare tire is installed, do not
drive in four-wheel drive until the soon as you can and installed back
“Removing the Flat Tire and onto your vehicle. This way, the
Installing the Spare Tire” and flat tire is repaired and/or
replaced. The vehicle could be spare tire will be available in case
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and you need it again.
Tools” under Tire Changing on damaged and the repairs would
page 10‑71. not be covered by the warranty. Do not mix tires and wheels of
Never use four-wheel drive when different sizes, because they will not
a different size spare tire is fit. Keep your spare tire and its
installed on the vehicle. wheel together.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑30.
Trying to start the vehicle by vehicles rolling, set the parking
If the vehicle battery has run down, pushing or pulling it will not brake firmly on both vehicles
you may want to use another work, and it could damage the involved in the jump start
vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle. procedure. Put an automatic
start your vehicle. Be sure to use transmission in P (Park) or a
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
the following steps to do it safely. manual transmission in Neutral
have a 12‐volt battery with a
negative ground system. before setting the parking brake.
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
If you have a four-wheel-drive
vehicle, be sure the transfer
Batteries can hurt you. They can has a 12-volt system with a case is not in Neutral.
be dangerous because: negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does Notice: If any accessories are left
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a on or plugged in during the jump
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles starting procedure, they could be
can be damaged. damaged. The repairs would not
. They contain gas that can
be covered by the vehicle
explode or ignite. 2. Get the vehicles close enough warranty. Whenever possible,
. They contain enough so the jumper cables can reach, turn off or unplug all accessories
electricity to burn you. but be sure the vehicles are not on either vehicle when jump
touching each other. If they are, starting the vehicle.
If you do not follow these steps it could cause a ground
exactly, some or all of these connection you do not want. You
things can hurt you. would not be able to start your
10-88 Vehicle Care
3. Turn off the ignition on both

vehicles. Unplug unnecessary { WARNING { WARNING
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine
power outlets. Turn off the radio cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
and all lamps that are not People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving
needed. This will avoid sparks and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running.
and help save both batteries. Use a flashlight if you need more
And it could save the radio! light. 5. Check that the jumper cables do
4. Open the hoods and locate the Be sure the batteries have not have loose or missing
positive (+) and negative (−) enough water. You do not need insulation. If they do, you could
terminal locations on the other to add water to the ACDelco® get a shock. The vehicles could
vehicle. Your vehicle has a battery (or batteries) installed in be damaged too.
remote positive (+) and a remote your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables,
negative (−) jump starting has filler caps, be sure the right here are some basic things you
terminal. See Engine amount of fluid is there. If it is low, should know. Positive (+) will go
Compartment Overview on add water to take care of that to positive (+) or to a remote
page 10‑6 for more information first. If you do not, explosive gas positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
on the terminal locations. could be present. has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
Battery fluid contains acid that part or to a remote negative (−)
can burn you. Do not get it on terminal if the vehicle has one.
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch 9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the negative (−) cable at least 45 cm
short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the (18 inches) away from the dead
battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote battery, but not near engine
too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle parts that move. The electrical
negative (−) cable to the has one. connection is just as good there,
negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black and the chance of sparks getting
battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the back to the battery is much less.
sparks. negative (−) terminal of the good Your vehicle has a remote
battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal for this
negative (−) terminal if the purpose.
vehicle has one. 10. Now start the vehicle with the
Do not let the other end touch good battery and run the
anything until the next step. The engine for a while.
other end of the negative (−) 11. Try to start the vehicle that had
cable does not go to the dead the dead battery. If it will not
battery. It goes to a heavy, start after a few tries, it
unpainted metal engine part, probably needs service.
or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead
covered by the vehicle warranty. battery.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black
order, making sure that the negative (−) cable from the
cables do not touch each other or vehicle with the good battery.
other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle.
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-91
Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity of
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another the towing vehicle? Be sure to
disabled vehicle should be towed vehicle – such as behind a motor read the tow vehicle
with all four wheels off the home. The two most common types manufacturer's
ground. Care must be taken with of recreational vehicle towing are recommendations.
vehicles that have low ground known as dinghy towing and dolly
clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the . What is the distance that will be
equipment. Always flatbed on a vehicle with all four wheels on the travelled? Some vehicles have
car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the restrictions on how far and how
vehicle with two wheels on the long they can tow.
Consult your dealer or a
ground and two wheels up on a . Is the proper towing equipment
professional towing service if the
device known as a dolly. going to be used? See your
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program dealer or trailering professional
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or for additional advice and
Roadside Assistance Program equipment recommendations.
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. . Is the vehicle ready to be
To tow the vehicle behind another towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for recreational purposes, vehicle for a long trip, make sure
such as behind a motor home, see the vehicle is prepared to be
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this towed.
section.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing transmissions have no provisions 3. Turn the engine off and firmly set
for internal lubrication while being the parking brake. See Parking
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles towed. Brake on page 9‑45.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles 4. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the tow vehicle.
{ WARNING
Shifting a full‐time
four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's
transfer case into N (Neutral) can
cause the vehicle to roll even if
the automatic transmission is in
P (Park) or the manual
transmission is in any gear. You
Notice: If the vehicle is towed or others could be injured. Make
with all four wheels on the sure the parking brake is firmly
ground, the drivetrain Use the following procedure to set before the transfer case is
components could be damaged. dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive shifted to N (Neutral).
The repairs would not be covered vehicle:
by the vehicle warranty. Do not 1. Position the vehicle being towed 5. Shift the transfer case to
tow the vehicle with all four behind the tow vehicle. N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
wheels on the ground.
2. Put an automatic transmission N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not in P (Park) or a manual Drive on page 10‑30.
be towed with all four wheels on the transmission in 1 (First).
ground. Two-wheel-drive
Vehicle Care 10-93
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF Dolly Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
and remove the key — the front be towed with the rear wheels on
wheels will still turn. Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the ground. Two-wheel-drive
the Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐Drive transmissions have no provisions
7. Release the parking brake only Vehicles
after the vehicle being towed is for internal lubrication while being
firmly attached to the towing towed.
vehicle. To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive
After towing see “Shifting Out of vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive with the rear wheels on the dolly.
on page 10‑30. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground)” later in this section for
If the vehicle being towed will not be more information.
started or driven for six weeks or
more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent the battery from
draining.
Notice: If a two-wheel drive
vehicle is towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, the
transmission could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Never
tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels on the ground.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off 3. Put an automatic transmission in 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
the Ground) – Four-Wheel-Drive P (Park) or a manual following the manufacturer's
Vehicles transmission in 1 (First). instructions.
4. Turn the engine off and firmly set 6. Shift the transfer case to
the parking brake. See Parking N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
Brake on page 9‑45. N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel
Drive on page 10‑30.
{ WARNING 7. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐ firmly attached to the towing
drive vehicle's transfer case into vehicle.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the automatic 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
transmission is in P (Park) or the After towing, see “Shifting Out of
manual transmission is in any N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive
gear. You or others could be on page 10‑30.
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from injured. Make sure the parking If the vehicle being towed will not be
the front: brake is firmly set before the started or driven for six weeks or
transfer case is shifted to more, remove the battery cable from
1. Attach the dolly to the tow N (Neutral). the negative terminal (post) of the
vehicle following the dolly battery to prevent the battery from
manufacturer's instructions. draining.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the 3. Firmly set the parking brake. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐Drive See Parking Brake on Ground) – Four‐Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles page 9‑45. Vehicles
4. Put an automatic transmission in
P (Park) or a manual
transmission in 1 (First).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Use the following procedure to dolly If the vehicle being towed will Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from not be started or driven for tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear: six weeks or more, remove the the rear:
battery cable from the negative
1. Attach the dolly to the tow terminal (post) of the battery to 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly prevent the battery from vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions. draining. manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly. dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑45.
10-96 Vehicle Care
4. Put an automatic transmission 7. Shift the transfer case to Appearance Care

in P (Park) or a manual N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
transmission in 1 (First). N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel
Drive on page 10‑30. Exterior Care
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Washing the Vehicle
instructions. If the vehicle being towed will To preserve the vehicle's finish,
6. Use an adequate clamping not be started or driven for wash it often and out of direct
device designed for towing to six weeks or more, remove the sunlight.
ensure that the front wheels are battery cable from the negative Notice: Do not use petroleum
locked into the straight position. terminal (post) of the battery to based, acidic, or abrasive
prevent the battery from cleaning agents as they can
{ WARNING draining. damage the vehicle's paint, metal,
After towing, see “Shifting Out of or plastic parts. If damage
Shifting a full‐time N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive occurs, it would not be covered
four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's on page 10‑30. by the vehicle's warranty.
transfer case into N (Neutral) can Approved cleaning products can
cause the vehicle to roll even if be obtained from your dealer.
the automatic transmission is in Follow all manufacturer
P (Park) or the manual directions regarding correct
transmission is in any gear. You product usage, necessary safety
or others could be injured. Make precautions, and appropriate
sure the parking brake is firmly disposal of any vehicle care
set before the transfer case is product.
shifted to N (Neutral).
Vehicle Care 10-97
Notice: Avoid using high damage the vehicle's finish if they Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
pressure washes closer than remain on painted surfaces. Wash Parts
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the the vehicle as soon as possible. Regularly clean bright metal parts
vehicle. Use of power washers If necessary, use non-abrasive with water or chrome polish on
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) cleaners that are marked safe for chrome or stainless steel trim,
can result in damage or removal painted surfaces to remove foreign if necessary.
of paint and decals. matter.
For aluminum, never use auto or
Rinse the vehicle well, before Occasional hand waxing or mild chrome polish, steam, or caustic
washing and after, to remove all polishing should be done to remove soap to clean. A coating of wax,
cleaning agents completely. If they residue from the paint finish. See rubbed to high polish, is
are allowed to dry on the surface, your dealer for approved cleaning recommended for all bright metal
they could stain. products. parts.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean Notice: Machine compounding or
chamois or an all-cotton towel to aggressive polishing on a Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
avoid surface scratches and water basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Lenses
spotting. may damage it. Use only Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
non-abrasive waxes and polishes soft cloth, and a car washing soap
Finish Care that are made for a basecoat/ to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Application of aftermarket clearcoat clearcoat paint finish on the Follow instructions under "Washing
sealant/wax materials is not vehicle. the Vehicle" later in this section.
recommended. If painted surfaces To keep the paint finish looking new,
are damaged, see your dealer to keep the vehicle garaged or
have the damage assessed and covered whenever possible.
repaired. Foreign materials such as
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
10-98 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
the vehicle is not washed after
with glass cleaner. clean the tires.
driving on roads that have been
Clean rubber blades using lint-free Notice: Using petroleum-based sprayed with magnesium,
cloth or paper towel soaked with tire dressing products on the calcium, or sodium chloride.
windshield washer fluid or a mild vehicle may damage the paint These chlorides are used on
detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying roads for conditions such as ice
thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off and dust. Always wash the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted chrome with soap and water after
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. exposure.
treatments may cause wiper
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum Notice: To avoid surface damage,
streaking.
or Chrome do not use strong soaps,
Replace the wiper blades if they chemicals, abrasive polishes,
are worn or damaged. Damage can Use a soft, clean cloth with mild cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
be caused by extreme dusty soap and water to clean the wheels. that contain acid on aluminum or
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, After rinsing thoroughly with clean chrome-plated wheels. Use only
snow and ice. water, dry with a soft, clean towel. approved cleaners. Also, never
A wax may then be applied. drive a vehicle with aluminum or
Weatherstrips chrome-plated wheels through an
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
Apply silicone grease on clean cloth with mild soap and automatic car wash that uses
weatherstrips to make them last water. Rinse with clean water. After silicone carbide tire cleaning
longer, seal better, and not stick or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, brushes. Damage could occur
squeak. See Recommended Fluids clean towel. A wax may then be and the repairs would not be
and Lubricants on page 11‑12. applied. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Steering, Suspension, and Underbody Maintenance Finish Damage

Chassis Components Use plain water to flush dirt and Quickly repair minor chips and
Visually inspect front and rear debris from the vehicle's underbody. scratches with touch-up materials
suspension and steering system for Your dealer or an underbody car available from your dealer to avoid
damaged, loose, or missing parts or washing system can do this. If not corrosion. Larger areas of finish
signs of wear. Inspect the power removed, rust and corrosion can damage can be corrected in your
steering for proper hook-up, binding, develop. dealer's body and paint shop.
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
check constant velocity joints,
Sheet Metal Damage Chemical Paint Spotting
rubber boots, and axle seals for If the vehicle is damaged and Airborne pollutants can fall upon
leaks. requires sheet metal repair or and attack painted vehicle surfaces
replacement, make sure the body causing blotchy, ring-shaped
Body Component Lubrication repair shop applies anti-corrosion discolorations, and small, irregular
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, material to parts repaired or dark spots etched into the paint
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and replaced to restore corrosion surface.
steel fuel door hinge unless the protection.
components are plastic. Applying Original manufacturer replacement Interior Care
silicone grease on weatherstrips parts will provide the corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
with a clean cloth will make them protection while maintaining the regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
last longer, seal better, and not stick vehicle warranty. Immediately remove any soils. Note
or squeak.
that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Use a soft bristle brush to remove To prevent damage, do not clean

. Do not heavily saturate the
dust from knobs and crevices on the the interior using the following upholstery when cleaning.
instrument cluster. Using a mild cleaners or techniques: . Do not use solvents or cleaners
soap solution, immediately remove . Never use a razor or any other containing solvents.
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect sharp object to remove a soil
repellant from all interior surfaces or Interior Glass
from any interior surface.
permanent damage may result. To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
. Never use a brush with stiff dampened with water. Wipe droplets
Your dealer may have products for bristles.
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners left behind with a clean dry cloth.
specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface Commercial glass cleaners may be
surfaces being cleaned to prevent aggressively or with excessive used, if necessary, after cleaning
permanent damage. To prevent pressure. the interior glass with plain water.
overspray, apply all cleaners directly . Do not use laundry detergents Notice: To prevent scratching,
to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners or dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on
should be removed quickly. Never degreasers. For liquid cleaners, automotive glass. Abrasive
allow cleaners to remain on the use approximately 20 drops cleaners or aggressive cleaning
surface being cleaned for extended per 3.78L (1 gal) of water. may damage the rear window
periods of time. A concentrated soap solution will defogger.
Cleaners may contain solvents that leave a residue that creates
can become concentrated in the streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
interior. Before using cleaners, read use solutions that contain strong
and adhere to all safety instructions or caustic soap.
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors
and windows.
Vehicle Care 10-101
Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the Instrument Panel, Leather,

soil and gently rub toward the Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth
using a soft brush attachment. If a Use a soft microfiber cloth
to a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being dampened with water to remove
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it dust and loose dirt. For a more
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, thorough cleaning, use a soft
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the microfiber cloth dampened with a
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no mild soap solution.
following techniques: longer any color transfer from
the soil to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Soaking or saturating
. Gently blot liquids with a paper leather, especially perforated
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely leather, as well as other interior
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap surfaces, may cause permanent
solution followed by only club damage. Wipe excess moisture
. For solid soils, remove as much
soda or plain water. from these surfaces after
as possible prior to vacuuming.
If the soil is not completely cleaning and allow them to dry
To clean: naturally. Never use heat, steam,
removed, it may be necessary to
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery spot lifters or spot removers. Do
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small not use cleaners that contain
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before silicone or wax-based products.
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery Cleaners containing these
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring solvents can permanently change
formation occurs, clean the entire the appearance and feel of leather
2. Remove excess moisture by or soft trim and are not
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
recommended.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
10-102 Vehicle Care
Do not use cleaners that increase Care of Safety Belts Use the following guidelines for
gloss, especially on the instrument proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease . The original equipment floor
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions. { WARNING mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Notice: Use of air fresheners may Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacing, it is recommended
cause permanent damage to It may severely weaken them. In that GM certified floor mats be
plastics and painted surfaces. a crash, they might not be able to purchased. Non-GM floor mats
If an air freshener comes in provide adequate protection. may not fit properly and may
contact with any plastic or Clean safety belts only with mild interfere with the pedals. Always
painted surface in the vehicle, soap and lukewarm water. check that the floor mats do not
blot immediately and clean with a interfere with the pedals.
soft cloth dampened with a mild . Use the floor mat with the
soap solution. Damage caused by Floor Mats correct side up. Do not turn
air fresheners would not be it over.
{ WARNING . Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can . Use only a single floor mat on
interfere with the pedals. the driver side.
Interference with the pedals can . Do not place one floor mat on
cause unintended acceleration top of another.
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up‐to‐date tools and equipment keep the vehicle in good working
for fast and accurate diagnostics. condition.
Recommended Fluids, Many dealers have extended
Lubricants, and Parts The Tire Rotation and Required
evening and Saturday hours,
Recommended Fluids and Services are the responsibility of the
courtesy transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 vehicle owner. It is recommended to
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement have your dealer perform these
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use Refer to the information in the

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Maintenance Schedule Additional { WARNING
There may need to be more Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
frequent checks and services. Performing maintenance work can
The Additional Required be dangerous and can cause
The Additional Required Services ‐ Severe are for vehicles
Services ‐ Normal are for serious injury. Perform
that are: maintenance work only if the
vehicles that:
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic required information, proper tools,
. Carry passengers and cargo in hot weather. and equipment are available.
within recommended limits on
. Mainly driven in hilly or If they are not, see your dealer to
the Tire and Loading Information
mountainous terrain. have a trained technician do the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑19. work. See Doing Your Own
. Frequently towing a trailer. Service Work on page 10‑4.
. Are driven on reasonable road . Used for high speed or
surfaces within legal driving competitive driving.
limits.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery
. Use the recommended fuel. See service.
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑53. Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every 12 000 km/
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10‑60.
Engine Oil on page 10‑10. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed,
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10‑10 and Engine
page 10‑54.
If the engine oil life system is reset Oil Life System on page 10‑12.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See accidentally, service the vehicle . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑60. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
. Check the windshield washer last service. Reset the oil life . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on system when the oil is changed.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑26.
page 10‑12.

. Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect steering, . Check automatic transmission
blades for wear, cracking, suspension, and chassis shift lock control function. See
or contamination. See Exterior components for damaged, loose, Automatic Transmission Shift
Care on page 10‑96. Replace or missing parts or signs of Lock Control Function Check on
worn or damaged wiper blades. wear. See Exterior Care on page 10‑33.
See Wiper Blade Replacement page 10‑96. . Check ignition transmission lock.
on page 10‑34. . Check restraint system See Ignition Transmission Lock
. Check tire inflation pressures. components. See Safety System Check on page 10‑33.
See Tire Pressure on Check on page 3‑19. . Check parking brake and
page 10‑54. . Visually inspect fuel system for automatic transmission park
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire damage or leaks. mechanism. See Park Brake and
Inspection on page 10‑60. . Visually inspect exhaust system P (Park) Mechanism Check on
. Visually check for fluid leaks. and nearby heat shields for page 10‑34.
loose or damaged parts. . Check accelerator pedal for
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Lubricate body components. See damage, high effort, or binding.
page 10‑17. Exterior Care on page 10‑96. Replace if needed.
. Inspect brake system. . Check starter switch. See Starter
. Visually inspect gas strut for
Switch Check on page 10‑32. signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.

Footnotes — Maintenance b) Or every four years, whichever d) Or every five years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required comes first. comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Normal c) Do not directly power wash the page 10‑18.
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines transfer case output seals. High e) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook‐up, pressure water can overcome the comes first. Inspect for fraying,
routing, and condition. Check that seals and contaminate the transfer excessive cracking, or damage;
the purge valve, if the vehicle has case fluid. Contaminated fluid will replace, if needed.
one, works properly. Replace as decrease the life of the transfer
needed. case and should be replaced.

Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional

Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe Services Maintenance and Care
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
and hoses for proper hook‐up, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
routing, and condition. Check that components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
the purge valve, if the vehicle has 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
one, works properly. Replace as . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
needed. maintenance services may be
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever required. It is recommended that
comes first. your dealer perform these
services — their trained dealer
c) Do not directly power wash the technicians know your vehicle best.
transfer case output seals. High Your dealer can also perform a
pressure water can overcome the thorough assessment with a
seals and contaminate the transfer multi‐point inspection to recommend
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will when your vehicle may need
decrease the life of the transfer attention. The following list is
case and should be replaced. intended to explain the services and
d) Or every five years, whichever conditions to look for that may
comes first. See Cooling System on indicate services are required.
page 10‑18.
e) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
Battery Brakes Fluids

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are Proper fluid levels and approved
the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include and components. See
. To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing Recommended Fluids and
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
battery with full cranking power. approved fluids.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
. Engine oil and windshield
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and washer fluid levels should be
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts checked at every fuel fill.
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. . Instrument cluster lights may
corrosion‐free. come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
Belts filled.
. Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of Hoses
cracking or splitting. Hoses transport fluids and should
. Trained dealer technicians can be regularly inspected to ensure
inspect the belts and that there are no cracks or leaks.
recommend replacement when With a multi‐point inspection, your
necessary. dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.
Lamps Shocks and Struts Tires

Properly working headlamps, Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
taillamps, and brake lamps are for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
important to see and be seen on . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and
the road. steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure.
. Signs that the headlamps need sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be
attention include dimming, failure stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more
to light, cracking, or damage. tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord
The brake lamps need to be . As part of the multi‐point or fabric showing through the
checked periodically to ensure inspection, trained dealer rubber; cracks or cuts in the
that they light when braking. technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
. With a multi‐point inspection, the shocks and struts for signs split in the tire.
your dealer can check the lamps of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can
and note any concerns. or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
Vehicle Care Windshield Wiper Blades

To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
available from your dealer. For clean and clear. provide a clear view.
information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
exterior, see Interior Care on and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
page 10‑99 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑96. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
Wheel Alignment if needed. replace them when needed.
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Parking Brake Cable Guides
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 89021806, in Canada 89021807).
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) or
Hydraulic Clutch System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubrication
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Front and Rear Axle
Canada 89021678).
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349, in
Transfer Case
Canada 10953465).
Rear Driveline Center Spline and Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Universal Joints lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Constant Velocity Universal Joint
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Hinges, Body Door
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hinge Pins, Liftgate Hinge and
Canada 10953474).
Linkage, and Fuel Door Hinge
Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
and Hinges Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15942429 —
Engine Oil Filter
2.9L L4 Engine 19210283 PF46
3.7L L5 Engine 19210285 PF61
5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
2.9L L4 and 3.7L L5 Engines 12625058 41-103
5.3L V8 Engine 12609877 41-985
Wiper Blades
Driver Side — 55 cm (22 in) 10389562 —
Passenger Side — 48 cm (19 in) 10389563 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
2.9L L4 Engine 9.8 L 10.4 qt
3.7L L5 Engine 10.0 L 10.6 qt
5.3L V8 Engine 13.0 L 13.7 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.9L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.7L L5 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
5.3L V8 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 74 L 19.5 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities and Specifications (cont'd)

Capacities
Application Metric English
Transmission
Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 4.7 L 5.0 qt
Manual– Rear-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.2 L 2.3 qt
Manual– Four-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.3 L 2.4 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Type VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
2.9L L4 9 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
Manual
3.7L L5 E Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 P Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L Engine
2.9L and 3.7L Engines
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-20 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Radio Frequency If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22 reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 of your dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a

. Dealership name and location. The BBB Auto Line Program is an
member of dealership management, . Vehicle delivery date and out-of-court program administered
it appears your concern cannot be present mileage. by the Council of Better Business
resolved by your dealership without Bureaus to settle automotive
further help, in the U.S., call the When contacting Chevrolet, disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
Chevrolet Customer Assistance remember that your concern will the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In likely be resolved at a dealer's Limited Warranty. Although you may
Canada, call General Motors of facility. That is why we suggest be required to resort to this informal
Canada Customer Care Centre at following Step One first. dispute resolution program prior to
1-800-263-3777 (English), STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: filing a court action, use of the
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Both General Motors and your program is free of charge and your
We encourage you to call the dealer are committed to making case will generally be heard within
toll-free number in order to give your sure you are completely satisfied 40 days. If you do not agree with the
inquiry prompt attention. Have the with your new vehicle. However, decision given in your case, you
following information available to if you continue to remain unsatisfied may reject it and proceed with any
give the Customer Assistance after following the procedure other venue for relief available
representative: outlined in Steps One and Two, you to you.
can file with the Better Business
. Vehicle Identification Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
Number (VIN). This is available to enforce your rights.
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning
Program using the toll-free Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
telephone number or write them at not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
the following address: addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
BBB Auto Line Program procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
Council of Better Business and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Bureaus, Inc. Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
4200 Wilson Boulevard participation in a no-charge or write to:
Suite 800 Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 of owner disputes involving
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto Mail Code: CA1-163-005
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
This program is available in all claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
50 states and the District of the review of the facts involved by
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
vehicle age, mileage, and other may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
factors. General Motors reserves before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
the right to change eligibility designed so that the entire dispute
limitations and/or discontinue its settlement process, from the time
participation in this program. you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Customer Satisfaction the good intentions of all parties STEP THREE

involved, sometimes a
Procedure (Mexico) misunderstanding may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
If you have a problem that has not dealer, please call the General
been satisfactorily handled through Motors Customer Assistance
the normal means, we suggest the Center (CAC) and provide the
following steps: following information:
STEP ONE . Name
Explain your case to your dealer . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension service agent, service manager, . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors to supplement the manager, depending on your case.
. Model year
warranty included with the new . Brand
vehicle purchase. Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. interested in your continual Number (VIN)
satisfaction.
Customer Assistance . Mileage
Procedure STEP TWO . Delivery date
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and contact the general manager or your
. Dealership name
General Motors. dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
your case, ask them to contact the
transaction, sale, or usage of the
right people at General Motors for
vehicle must be handled by your
support, if needed.
dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that despite
See Customer Assistance Offices From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America, and
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or 1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more Virgin Islands)
information. From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance R.L. de C.V.
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Offices (U.S. and Canada) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Chevrolet encourages customers Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
to call the toll-free number for C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
CA1-163-005
assistance. However, if a customer 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
the letter should be addressed to: www.gm.ca
United States 1-800-263-3777 (English) Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-7854 (French) Offices (Mexico)
Chevrolet Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance
Center Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
P.O. Box 33170 Roadside Assistance: numbers listed in this section.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 1-800-268-6800 Customer assistance is available
www.Chevrolet.com Overseas Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
1-800-222-1020 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Motors Business Unit.
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Roadside Assistance: Assistance Center (CAC) should be
1-800-243-8872 sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Mexico Customer Assistance for Online Owner Center

From Mexico City Text Telephone (TTY) Manage your vehicle (U.S.) at
5329-0811 Users (U.S. and Canada) chevrolet.com. Click on
From Other Mexico Locations To assist customers who are deaf, “Owners,” then “Manage My
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Chevrolet/Owners Login.”
01-800-466-0811 and who use Text Telephones Information and services
United States and Canada (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY customized for your specific
equipment available at its Customer vehicle — all in one convenient
1-866-466-8190 Assistance Center. Any TTY user in place.
Costa Rica the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
. Digital owner manual, warranty
00-800-052-1005 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in information, and more.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. . Storage for online service and
Guatemala
maintenance records.
1-800-999-5252 . Chevrolet dealer locator for
Panama service nationwide.
00-800-052-0001 . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Dominican Republic
. Recall notices for your specific
vehicle.
1-888-751-5301
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
El Salvador Services Earnings summaries.
800-6273
Honduras
800-0122-6101

. Locate owner resources such as
Other Helpful Links
lease-end, financing, and
GM Mobility
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com warranty information. Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise — . Retrieve your favorite articles, (U.S. and Canada)
www.chevymall.com quizzes, tips and multimedia
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ galleries organized into the
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do Features and Auto Care
. Sections.
FAQ
. Download the owner manual for
. Contact Us
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Chevrolet Owner Centre . Find the
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca This program is available to
Chevrolet-recommended
qualified applicants for cost
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner maintenance services for your
reimbursement of eligible
Centre: vehicle.
aftermarket adaptive equipment
. Chat live with online help required for the vehicle, such as
representatives. hand controls or a wheelchair/
.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
Use the Vehicle Tools section.
For more information on the limited
. Access third party enthusiast offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
sites and social media networks. call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage

has a Mobility Program. Call
When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
details. TTY users call
ready: comes first.
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the
Roadside Assistance home telephone number. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
Program (U.S. and . Telephone number of your
permission from the owner is not
Canada) location.
covered.
. Location of the vehicle.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Roadside Assistance is not a part of
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). plate number of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to
call 1-800-268-6800. Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue
delivery date of the vehicle. the Roadside Assistance program at
Service is available 24 hours a day, any time without notification.
365 days a year. . Description of the problem.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided
. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
service station. responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
unlock the vehicle if you are covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
locked out. A remote unlock may this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
be available if you have OnStar. jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
For security reasons, the driver registration is required.
must present identification Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
before this service is given. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Emergency Tow from a Public . Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
Road or Highway: Tow to the violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a
warranty service, or if the vehicle limit of six requests per year.
was in a crash and cannot be . Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
driven. Assistance is also given or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
when the vehicle is stuck in the chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
sand, mud, or snow. . Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance This program expires two years
from the date of the invoice for the
250 kilometers from where your Program (Mexico) vehicle, regardless of vehicle
trip was started to qualify. As a new owner, your vehicle is mileage and changes in vehicle
General Motors of Canada automatically enrolled in the ownership.
Limited requires Roadside Assistance program. The
pre-authorization, original For more information about the
services are available at no cost renewal of this program at the end
detailed receipts, and a copy under the terms and conditions of
of the repair orders. Once of its term, contact the Chevrolet
the program. The Roadside Customer Assistance Center at
authorization has been received, Assistance program is not part of,
the Roadside Assistance advisor 01-800-466-0800.
or included, in the coverage
will help to make arrangements provided by the New Vehicle Limited Services Provided
and explain how to receive Warranty.
payment.
. Flat Tire Change : If unable to
Roadside Assistance provides change a flat tire, Roadside
. Alternative Service: If assistance to the driver and Assistance will provide towing
assistance cannot be provided passengers while driving the vehicle service to the nearest authorized
right away, the Roadside within your city of residence or on Chevrolet dealership. It is the
Assistance advisor may give any passable road in Mexico, the owner's responsibility for the
permission to get local United States, and Canada. repair or replacement of the tire.
emergency road service. You will Services are subject to the This service is limited to the
receive payment, up to $100, limitations described in the following transfer of the vehicle to the
after sending the original receipt pages. Program coverage varies by repair facility.
to Roadside Assistance. country.
Mechanical failures may be
. Emergency Fuel Delivery :
covered, however any cost for Roadside Assistance is available Delivery of enough fuel for the
parts and labor for repairs not 24 hours a day, 365 days of vehicle to get to the nearest
covered by the warranty are the the year. service station.
owner responsibility.

. Lock-Out Service : Service to accessible to be towed, all
. *Trip Interruption : This service
unlock the vehicle if you are maneuvers required to access it is provided if you are prevented
locked out. will be at the owner's expense. from further usage of your
. Battery Jump Start : Service to vehicle while traveling and it is
If the vehicle is in another city not possible for the nearest
jump start a dead battery. outside of your residence, Chevrolet dealership to repair
. *Emergency Messages : Roadside Assistance is limited the vehicle the same day,
Transmission of urgent phone to moving the vehicle to the requiring the vehicle to stay at
messages. nearest dealer. If you would like the dealership for a night or
the vehicle moved to a different more. If this happens, in addition
. *Emergency Calls : Call for dealer, you will be asked to
emergency services. to the previously listed services
cover the difference in cost at and prior to confirmation by the
. *Dealership Location the time of the move. dealership, you are entitled to
Assistance : Information If the vehicle cannot be received choose one of the following
regarding addresses and by the nearest Chevrolet dealer alternatives, within the limits of
telephone numbers for Chevrolet due to scheduling conflicts, the existing Roadside Assistance
dealers. vehicle will be taken to a safe program guidelines. If the costs
. Emergency Towing : Tow to the place where it will remain for up exceed the amount authorized
nearest dealer for warranty to 48 hours until it can be taken for these services, you must pay
service if the vehicle cannot be to the dealer. If the storage costs the difference at the time of
driven. exceed the amount authorized, service.
the owner is responsible to pay Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is involved in an
the difference at the time of will coordinate hotel
accident during the commission
service. Contact Roadside accommodations for all vehicle
of a crime, administrative
Assistance for more information travelers for up to two nights.
violation, or breach of traffic
on authorized amounts.
regulations, Roadside
Assistance will not provide
service. When the vehicle is not
A rental car will be provided for

. *Complimentary Services Not Included in Roadside
up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle Pick Assistance
must be returned to its original Up : Transportation to pick up
your vehicle after repairs are Roadside Assistance does not
destination, excluding vehicles cover or reimburse services for the
with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
reported that the vehicle has following:
than 3.5 tons.
been repaired, Roadside . Events caused by fraud or bad
Complimentary Transportation: If Assistance will provide bus or faith by the driver.
you prefer to continue your trip commercial airline one-way . Vehicle immobilization situations
to the intended destination or service (subject to availability)
return to your place of due to a major force or
for the person designated by you
residence, and the trip requires unforeseen circumstances, such
to collect your vehicle at the
more than eight hours driving on as natural phenomena of an
dealership's location if you or the
the road, transportation for the extraordinary nature,
designated person are not in the
driver and passengers by first earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
same town or city as the
class bus or coach commercial and other cyclonic storms.
dealership.
airline will be provided to a . Vehicle immobilization situations
location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided for
arising from car accidents
Assistance, depending on U.S. or Canada residents. All
caused by the driver of the
availability at the chosen services provided in the U.S. and
vehicle or third parties. This
destination. Restrictions apply Canada are at the owner's expense
means any occurrence that
based on vehicle specifications. and will be reimbursed by Roadside
causes physical injury to the
Assistance.
If you are on the road, taxi occupants and/or the vehicle
service to the nearest bus caused by external forces.
station or airport will be . Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,
provided. armed forces or police actions
which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.

. Food service, beverages,
telephone calls, or other extra
Contacting Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
costs. Accommodation costs Roadside Assistance services are of Appointments (U.S. and
apply only to Mexico per the no cost to you and available Canada)
terms and conditions of the 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance program. Costs are only incurred in situations When the vehicle requires warranty
that exceed the limits of the service, contact your dealer and
. Any damage to the vehicle program, some of which are listed request an appointment. By
without intent, derived from the previously in this section. scheduling a service appointment
services provided. and advising the service consultant
To contact Roadside Assistance by
. Cost of towing a trailer when of your transportation needs, your
phone, use the following numbers:
choosing a Chevrolet dealer that dealer can help minimize your
is nearest to the temporary Mexico inconvenience.
storage facility for the disabled 01-800-466-0800 If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
vehicle. into the service department
United States immediately, keep driving it until it
. Cost of all maneuvers required
to access the vehicle when it is 1-866-466-8901 can be scheduled for service,
not available to be towed. unless, of course, the problem is
Canada safety related. If it is, please call
. Cost of fuel provided. 1-800-268-6800 your dealership, let them know this,
Routine vehicle repair costs and ask for instructions.
E-mail
are not covered by the Roadside If your dealer requests you to bring
Assistance program. For more asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com the vehicle for service, you are
information, see your new vehicle Chevrolet reserves the right to make urged to do so as early in the work
warranty. any changes or discontinue the day as possible to allow for
Roadside Assistance program at same-day repair.
any time without notification.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Canada) completed while you wait. However, If the vehicle requires overnight
if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by transportation is used instead of
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation your dealer's shuttle service, the
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the expense must be supported by
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can original receipts and can only be up
program for vehicles with the offer one of the following: to the maximum amount allowed by
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service for U.S. customers, should you
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred arrange transportation through
hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy a friend or relative, limited
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable fuel
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your expenses may be available. Claim
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption amounts should reflect actual costs
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes and be supported by original
warranty repairs are required. one-way or round-trip shuttle service receipts. See your dealer for
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
part of the New Vehicle Limited or other transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

Your dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have the
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
for an overnight warranty repair. damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements will be parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include right to unilaterally modify, collisions.
minimum age requirements, change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are new
usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and parts made with the same materials
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its and construction methods as the
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. parts with which the vehicle was
usage beyond the completion of the originally built. Genuine GM
repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts Limited Warranty, and any vehicle reduced protection to the GM
may also be used for repair. These failure related to such parts is not vehicle by limiting compensation for
parts are typically removed from covered by that warranty. damage repairs through the use of
vehicles that were total losses in aftermarket collision parts. Some
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility insurance companies will not
parts being recycled are from GM also recommends that you specify aftermarket collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. choose a collision repair facility that When purchasing insurance, we
A recycled original equipment GM meets your needs before you ever recommend that you ensure that the
part may be an acceptable choice to need collision repairs. Your dealer vehicle will be repaired with GM
maintain the vehicle's originally may have a collision repair center original equipment collision parts.
designed appearance and safety with GM-trained technicians and If such insurance coverage is not
performance; however, the history of state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be available from your current
these parts is not known. Such parts able to recommend a collision repair insurance carrier, consider switching
are not covered by the GM New center that has GM-trained to another insurance carrier.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any technicians and comparable If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
related failures are not covered by equipment. company may require you to have
that warranty. insurance that ensures repairs with
Insuring the Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also Genuine GM Original Equipment
available. These are made by Protect your investment in the GM Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
companies other than GM and may vehicle with comprehensive and Genuine Manufacturer replacement
not have been tested for the vehicle. collision insurance coverage. There parts. Read the lease carefully, as
As a result, these parts may fit are significant differences in the you may be charged at the end of
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ quality of coverage afforded by the lease for poor quality repairs.
corrosion problems, and may not various insurance policy terms.
perform properly in subsequent Many insurance policies provide
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
. Owner name, address, and Managing the Vehicle Damage
telephone number. Repair Process
If there has been an injury, call .
emergency services for help. Do not Vehicle license plate number. In the event that the vehicle requires
leave the scene of a crash until all . Vehicle make, model, and damage repairs, GM recommends
matters have been taken care of. model year. that you take an active role in its
Move the vehicle only if its position repair. If you have a pre-determined
. Vehicle Identification
puts you in danger, or you are repair facility of choice, take the
Number (VIN).
instructed to move it by a police vehicle there, or have it towed there.
officer. . Insurance company and policy Specify to the facility that any
number. required replacement collision parts
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved . General description of the be original equipment parts, either
in the crash. damage to the other vehicle. new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
For emergency towing see Choose a reputable repair facility recycled parts will not be covered by
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. that uses quality replacement parts. the GM vehicle warranty.
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
Roadside Assistance Program section. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. but you must live with the repair.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Depending on your policy limits,
Gather the following information: Will You See after an Airbag your insurance company may
Inflates? on page 3‑26. initially value the repair using
. Driver name, address, and
telephone number. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
. Driver license number. Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Or write to:
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. Manual only. delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees. funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may call
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Center computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: data to help your dealer technician
CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio presets, seat positions, and . How fast the vehicle was
temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with an
if the vehicle is leased, with the active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded may also record data in crash or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or near crash‐like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM in the OnStar glove box kit, at
and crash location) is recorded. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as law collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
enforcement, could combine the
be made available to others for pressing the Q button and
EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely research purposes, where a need is speaking to an advisor.
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:
Identification (RFID) Statement
1. The device may not cause
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that harmful interference.
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal 2. The device must accept any
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) interference received, including
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada interference that may cause
as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310. undesired operation of the
unlocking and starting, and device.
in-vehicle transmitters for garage Changes or modifications to any of
door openers. RFID technology in these systems by other than an
GM vehicles does not use or record authorized service facility could void
personal information or link with any authorization to use this equipment.
other GM system containing
personal information.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

When Should an Airbag Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Airbags Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Adding Equipment to the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-17
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . 5-6
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Airbag System
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Alarm System Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
How Does an Airbag
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Automatic
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Passenger Sensing
Antenna Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
What Makes an Airbag
Anti-theft Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Automatic Transmission
What Will You See after an
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Carbon Monoxide

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-36, 10-37 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-39 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
Stoplamps, and CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Center High-Mounted
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-15 C Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
California Check
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Perchlorate Materials Ignition
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Child Restraints
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Infants and Young
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Capacities and Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Lower Anchors and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-38
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
INDEX i-3
Child Restraints (cont'd) Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Daytime Running

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-57, 3-59 Courtesy Transportation Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Door
Cleaning Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Customer Information Driver Information
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Service Publications Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18 Driving
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Customer Satisfaction Characteristics and
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-15 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-4 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 D Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-15 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Danger, Warnings, and Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Coolant Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-14
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-20 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-17
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine (cont'd) F

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9
Fan
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Cooling System Messages . . .5-24
Filter,
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
E Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Electrical Equipment, Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-102
Electrical System Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Fluid
Engine Compartment Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuses and Circuit Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-35
Four-Wheel Drive
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Engine Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-20
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Fog Lamps
Check and Service Engine Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-40
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
INDEX i-5
Front Seats G H
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Gasoline Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Gauges Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Engine Coolant Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Filling a Portable Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Daytime Running
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-53
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warning Lights and High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Requirements, California . . . . .9-53
General Information Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heater
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Fuses
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Engine Compartment
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
GM Mobility Reimbursement High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-55
Fuses and Circuit Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-14
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
i-6 INDEX
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 L Lighting

How to Wear Safety Belts Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-48
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lamps
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Lights
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
I Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Antilock Brake System
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Ignition Transmission Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15
Exterior Lamps Off
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Infants and Young Children, Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9
LATCH System
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Replacing Parts after a
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Traction Control System
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-17
K Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
INDEX i-7
Locks Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Mirrors (cont'd)

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Messages Monitor System, Tire
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Battery Voltage and Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 N
Lower Anchors and Tethers Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
for Children (LATCH Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-24
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 O
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
M Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Oil
Maintenance Schedule Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Recommended Fluids Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-35
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
i-8 INDEX
OnStar® Perchlorate Materials R

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Radio Frequency
Operation, Infotainment Phone
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Ordering Pickup Conversion to
Radios
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18 Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Outlets Power
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
P Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Park Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-31
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-9
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Brake and P (Park) Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34 Privacy
Recommended
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-34 Radio Frequency
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Passenger Airbag Status Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22
Recommended Fluids and
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Program
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-27 Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14
Records
Proposition 65 Warning,
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
INDEX i-9
Recreational Vehicle Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-50 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19
Reimbursement Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Roads U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Remote Keyless Entry Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Roadside Assistance Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Running the Vehicle While Seats
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-34 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Replacing LATCH System Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 S Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3
Reporting Safety Defects Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-9
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19 How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-82
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Securing Child
Restraints Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-57, 3-59
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security
Retained Accessory Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
i-10 INDEX
Service Spare Tire T

Accessories and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Specifications and
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Taillamps
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 StabiliTrak
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Theft-Deterrent
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-13
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Publications Ordering Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Tires
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Shift Lock Control Function Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Check, Automatic Storage
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Shifting Storage Areas
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-57
Signals, Turn and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont'd) Traction U

Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-47
Uniform Tire Quality
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-56 Control System (TCS)/
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-50
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Trailer
Terminology and Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 V
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Vehicle
Uniform Tire Quality Transmission Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Identification
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-67 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
When It Is Time for New Transportation Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Towing Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-58 Truck-Camper Loading Vehicle Care
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Turn and Lane-Change Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-91 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Turn Signal
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
i-12 INDEX
W Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Warning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Windshield
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Winter
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owners PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owners PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-38

2012 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

In Brief Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar

Remote Keyless Entry Lock and unlock feedback can be

Press UNLOCK to unlock the doors

Power Door Locks Safety Locks (Crew Cab) Tailgate

Windows Power Windows Express-Down Window

Regular Cab Shown, Crew Cab

To adjust a power seat, if available:

To adjust a manual seat:

Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

Steering Wheel Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Exterior Lighting For more information, see: Windshield Wiper/Washer

N: For adjustable interval wipes, Climate Controls

Four-Wheel Drive N (Neutral): Use the N (Neutral)

Vehicle Features q TUNE r: Turn to select radio

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Cruise Control

Driver Information Power Outlets Performance and

Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks If locked out of your vehicle, call the

Leaving children in a vehicle with With an active OnStar subscription,

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

If there is a decrease in the RKE Remote Keyless Entry

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

To open a rear door when the safety Doors

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Tailgate Tailgate Removal

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vehicle Security If the LOCK button on the RKE

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Testing the Alarm Immobilizer The key uses a transponder that

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Return the selector switch to the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

It is normal under certain conditions Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

Manual Windows Power Windows

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

This feature prevents the rear

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Rear Windows Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows